Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C-4419 - Purchase Agreement for Two 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and One 100' Heavy Duty Tiller Ladder Truck
PURCHASE AGREEMENT FOR TWO 1250 GPM TRIPLE COMBINATION PUMPERS AND ONE 100' HEAVY DUTY TILLER LADDER TRUCK FROM PIERCE MANUFACTURING INC. This Purchase Agreement (the "Agreement") is entered into as of this day of February, 2010 ("Execution Date"), by and between the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH, a California municipal corporation and charter city ("City"), and PIERCE MANUFACTURING INC., a Wisconsin Corporation ("Vendor"), whose principal place of business is 2600 American Dr., Appleton, Wisconsin 54914. RECITALS A. City is a municipal corporation duly organized and validly existing under the laws of the State of California with the power to carry on its business as it is now being conducted under the statutes of the State of California and the Charter of City. B. City requires two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new 100' Heavy Duty Tiller Ladder Truck (individually "Piece of Equipment" and collectively the "Equipment"). C. Vendor is a fire apparatus manufacturer and dealer. D. The principal members of Vendor for purposes of this Agreement shall be Cherry Sewell and Kevin Newell. E. City has solicited and received a proposal from Vendor, has evaluated the expertise of Vendor, and desires to submit an order for the Equipment under the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual representations, warranties and covenants, and other terms and conditions as set forth herein, Vendor and City (each a "Party" and together the "Parties") agree as follows: 1. COMPENSATION Total Compensation for Equipment, including all sales taxes, shall not exceed Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred Thirty One Dollars and no/100 ($2,099,631.00) ("Contract Price"), without prior written authorization. Total Compensation includes One Million Nine Hundred Thirty Thousand Six Hundred Ninety -Five Dollars and no/100 ($1,930,695.00) ("Purchase Price") payable to the Vendor and One Hundred Sixty Eight Thousand Nine Hundred Thirty Six Dollars and no/100 ($168,936.00) ("Taxes") payable directly to the California State Board of Equalization as fully described on the Pricing Page attached hereto as Exhibit A and incorporated herein by reference for the Equipment, which is described more fully in the final proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and Warranty Details in Exhibits B-1 and B-2 attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. Vendor agrees to accept this compensation as full remuneration for delivery to City of the Equipment. 1.1 Payment Schedule: The City shall pay Vendor twenty percent (20%) of purchase price or Three Hundred Eighty Six Thousand One Hundred Thirty Nine Dollars and no/100 ($386,139.00) within ten (10) days of City receipt of the performance bond, as required under section 11, a copy of which is attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by reference. The City shall pay Vendor remaining eighty percent of purchase price, or One Million Five Hundred Forty Four Thousand Five Hundred Fifty Six Dollars and no/100 ($1,544,556.00), no later than thirty (30) days after City approval of the final invoice. 1.2 Taxes: Under the City's Direct Payment Exemption permit number SR EAA 24-089475 DP, the City will self -accrue its Use Tax obligation to the California State Board of Equalization in the amount of One Hundred Sixty Eight Thousand Nine Hundred Thirty Six Dollars and no/100 ($168,936.00) within thirty (30) days of Equipment delivery to the City. If only partial delivery of equipment is received, the City will only pay the State Board of Equalization the amount of Use Tax due on the value of the equipment delivered. 2. ADMINISTRATION This Agreement will be administered by the General Services Department. Deputy Director Mike Pisani, or his designee, shall be the Purchase Administrator and shall have the authority to act for City under this Agreement. The Purchase Administrator or his/her authorized representative shall represent City in all matters pertaining to the services to be rendered pursuant to this Agreement. 3. DELIVERY Delivery to City of the Equipment shall be made within 300 calendar days from City issuance of the notice to proceed. Delivery shall be made to the City's Yard at 592 Superior Ave., Newport Beach, CA 92663. Time of delivery is of the essence in this Agreement. City reserves the right to refuse any goods and to cancel all or any part of the goods not conforming to applicable specifications, samples or descriptions. Acceptance of any part of the order for goods shall not bind City to accept future shipments nor deprive City of the right to return goods already accepted at Vendor's expense. Over shipments and under shipments of goods shall be only as agreed to in writing by City. Delivery shall not be deemed to be complete until all goods have actually been received and accepted in writing by the City. 3.1 Vendor shall submit all requests for extensions of time for delivery in writing to the City Purchase Administrator not later than ten (10) calendar days after the start of the condition that purportedly causes a delay. The Page 12 Purchase Administrator shall review all such requests and may, at his sole discretion, grant reasonable time extensions for unforeseeable delays that are beyond Vendor's control. 3.2 The parties agree that it is extremely difficult and impractical to determine and fix the actual damages that City will sustain should the Vendor fail to complete the work called for in this Agreement. Should Vendor fail to complete the work called for in this Agreement, Vendor agrees to the deduction of liquidated damages in the sum of Two Hundred Dollars and no/100 ($200.00) per day, per Piece of Equipment, for every day beyond the date scheduled for delivery provided in Section 3. Execution of this Agreement shall constitute agreement by the City and Vendor that the sum of Two Hundred Dollars and no/100 ($200.00) per day, per Piece of Equipment is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the failure of Vendor to deliver the Equipment within the allotted time. Such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and may be deducted from payments due the Vendor if such delay occurs. 4. ACCEPTANCE/ PAYMENT Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by City, acceptance shall not be deemed complete unless in writing and until each Piece of Equipment has actually been received, inspected and tested to the satisfaction of City, and payment shall be made in arrears after satisfactory acceptance. 5. NOTICES All notices, demands, requests or approvals to be given under the terms of this Agreement shall be given in writing, and conclusively shall be deemed served when delivered personally, or on the third business day after the deposit thereof in the United States mail, postage prepaid, first-class mail, addressed as hereinafter provided. All notices, demands, requests or approvals from Vendor to City shall be addressed to City at: Attn: Mike Pisani General Services Deputy Director City of Newport Beach 3300 Newport Boulevard PO Box 1768 Newport Beach, CA 92658 Phone: 949-644-3101 Fax: 949-673-3056 Email: mpisani _newportbeachca.gov Page 13 All notices, demands, requests or approvals from City to Vendor shall be addressed to Vendor at: With a copy to: Attention: Cherry Sewell Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. 2600 American Dr. Appleton, WI 54914 Phone: 920-832-4433 Fax: 920-832-3080 Email: csewell@piercemfg.com Kevin Newell South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc. 2020 South Baker Ave. Ontario, CA 91761 Phone: 909-673-9900 Fax: 909-673-9700 Email: Kevin@southcoastfire.net 6. GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE This Agreement shall be deemed negotiated and executed in the State of California and shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the state of California. In the event of any legal action to enforce or interpret this Agreement, the sole and exclusive venue shall be the Orange County Superior Court, located in Orange County, California, and the parties hereto agree to and do hereby submit to the jurisdiction of such court. Furthermore, the parties specifically agree to waive any and all rights to request that an action be transferred for trial to another City. 7. AMENDMENTS No alteration or variation of the terms of this Agreement shall be valid unless made in writing and signed by the parties; no oral understanding or agreement not incorporated herein shall be binding on either of the parties; and no exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding on City unless authorized by City in writing. 8. TAXES The price quoted includes California state sales or use taxes. 9. ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Agreement, when accepted by the Vendor either in writing or by the shipment of any articles, goods, or other commencement of performance hereunder, contains the entire Agreement between the parties with respect to all Page 14 matters herein, and there are no restrictions, promises, warranties, or undertakings other than those set forth herein or referred to herein. No exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding on City unless authorized by City in writing. Electronic acceptance of any additional terms, conditions or supplemental agreements by any City employee or agent, shall not be valid or binding on City unless accepted in writing by the Purchase Administrator. The terms of this Agreement shall supersede any inconsistencies between this Agreement and the Exhibits hereto. 10. WARRANTY Vendor expressly warrants that the goods covered by this Agreement are: 1) free of liens or encumbrances; 2) of merchantable quality and good for the ordinary purposes for which they are used; and 3) fit for the particular purpose for which they are intended. Acceptance of this order shall constitute an agreement upon Vendor's part to indemnify, defend and hold City and its indemnities as identified in paragraph 17 below, and as more fully described in paragraph 17, harmless from liability, loss, damage and expense, including reasonable counsel fees, incurred or sustained by City by reason of the failure of the goods to conform to such warranties, faulty work performance, negligent or unlawful acts, and non- compliance with any applicable state or federal codes, ordinances, orders, or statutes, including the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and the California Industrial Safety Act. Such remedies shall be in addition to any other remedies provided by law. Vendor and/or manufacturer's warranty, as applicable, is attached hereto as part of Exhibits B-1 and B-2, and incorporated in full by this reference. The Warranty Period shall commence on the date the Equipment is delivered to the City. All warranty repair work shall be conducted by a Vendor certified dealer/ agent in the southern California region. As of execution of Agreement the Vendor certified dealer/ agent for purposes of all repairs and warranty work is: South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc., 2020 S. Baker Ave., Ontario, CA 91761. In the event that Vendor designates a different certified dealer/ agent for the southern California region, Vendor shall provide City with written notice of such change within ten (10) days of the change. 11. BONDING Vendor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of this Contract: a Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total amount to be paid by Vendor as set forth in this Agreement in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C which is incorporated herein by this reference. Page 15 The Faithful Performance Bond shall be issued by an insurance organization or surety (1) currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business of insurance in the State of California, (2) listed as an acceptable surety in the latest revision of the Federal Register Circular 570, and (3) assigned a Policyholders' Rating A and Financial Size Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance with the latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide: Property -Casualty. The Vendor shall deliver, concurrently with execution of this Agreement, the Faithful Performance Bond and a certified copy of the "Certificate of Authority" of the Insurer or Surety issued by the Insurance Commissioner, which authorizes the Insurer or Surety to transact surety insurance in the State of California. 12. ASSIGNEMENT OR SUBCONTRACTING The terms, covenants, and conditions contained herein shall apply to and bind the heirs, successors, executors, administrators and assigns of the parties. Furthermore, neither the performance of this Agreement nor any portion thereof may be assigned or sub -contracted by Vendor without the express written consent of City. Any attempt by Vendor to assign or subcontract the performance or any portion thereof of this Agreement without the express written consent of City shall be invalid and shall constitute a breach of this Agreement. 13. NON-DISCRIMINATION In the performance of this Agreement, Vendor agrees that it will comply with the requirements of Section 1735 of the California Labor Code and not engage nor permit any subcontractors to engage in discrimination in employment of persons because of the race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status, or sex of such persons. Vendor acknowledges that a violation of this provision shall subject Vendor to all the penalties imposed for a violation of Section 1720 et seq. of the California Labor Code. 14. TERMINATION In the event that either party fails or refuses to perform any of the provisions of this Agreement at the time and in the manner required, that party shall be deemed in default in the performance of this Agreement. If such default is not cured within a period of two (2) calendar days, or if more than two (2) calendar days are reasonably required to cure the default and the defaulting party fails to give adequate assurance of due performance within two (2) calendar days after receipt of written notice of default, specifying the nature of such default and the steps necessary to cure such default, and thereafter diligently take steps to cure the default, the non -defaulting party may terminate the Agreement forthwith by giving to the defaulting party written notice thereof. Cause shall further be defined as any breach of this Agreement, any misrepresentation or fraud on the part of the Vendor and/or filing of any petition in U.S. Bankruptcy Court or entering of Bankruptcy by Vendor. Page 16 Notwithstanding the above provisions, City shall have the right, at its sole discretion without cause, of terminating this Agreement at any time by giving seven (7) calendar days prior written notice to Vendor. In the event of termination under this Section, City shall pay Vendor for services satisfactorily performed and costs incurred up to the effective date of termination for which Vendor has not been previously paid. On the effective date of termination, Vendor shall deliver to City all Equipment, reports, Documents and other information developed or accumulated in the performance of this Agreement, whether in draft or final form. 15. CONSENT TO BREACH NOT WAIVER No term or provision of this Agreement shall be deemed waived and no breach excused, unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party claimed to have waived or consented to such breach. Any consent by any party to, or waiver of, a breach by the other, whether express or implied, shall not constitute consent to, waiver of, or excuse for any other different or subsequent breach. 16. REMEDIES NOT EXCLUSIVE The remedies for breach set forth in this Agreement are cumulative as to one another and as to any other provided by law, rather than exclusive; and the expression of certain remedies in this Agreement does not preclude resort by either party to any other remedies provided by law. 17. PERFORMANCE Vendor shall perform all work under this Agreement, taking necessary steps and precautions to perform the work to City's satisfaction. Vendor shall be responsible for the professional quality, technical assurance, timely completion and coordination of all documentation and other goods or services furnished by the Vendor under this Agreement. Vendor shall perform all work diligently, carefully, and in a good and workman -like manner; shall furnish all labor, supervision, machinery, equipment, materials, and supplies necessary therefore; shall at its sole expense obtain and maintain all permits and licenses required by public authorities, including those of City required in its governmental capacity, in connection with performance of the work; and, if permitted to subcontract, shall be fully responsible for all work performed by subcontractors. 18. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Vendor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless City, its City Council, boards and commissions, officers, agents, volunteers, and employees (collectively, the "Indemnified Parties") from and against any and all claims (including, without limitation, claims for bodily injury, death or damage to property), demands, obligations, damages, actions, causes of action, suits, losses, judgments, fines, penalties, liabilities, costs and expenses Page 17 (including, without limitation, attorney's fees, disbursements and court costs) of every kind and nature whatsoever (individually, a Claim; collectively, "Claims"), which may arise from or in any manner relate (directly or indirectly) to any breach of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, any work performed or services provided under this Agreement including, without limitation, defects in workmanship or materials (including the negligent and/or willful acts, errors and/or omissions of Vendor, its principals, officers, agents, employees, suppliers, consultants, subcontractors, anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of them or for whose acts they may be liable or any or all of them). Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall be construed to require Vendor to indemnify the Indemnified Parties from any Claim arising from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Nothing in this indemnity shall be construed as authorizing any award of attorney's fees in any action on or to enforce the terms of this Agreement. This indemnity shall apply to all claims and liability regardless of whether any insurance policies are applicable. The policy limits do not act as a limitation upon the amount of indemnification to be provided by the Vendor. 19. BILLS AND LEINS Vendor shall pay promptly all indebtedness for labor, materials and equipment used in performance of the work. Vendor shall not permit any lien or charge to attach to the goods, but if any does so attach, Vendor shall promptly procure its release and, in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 17 above, indemnify, defend, and hold City harmless and be responsible for payment of all costs, damages, penalties and expenses related to or arising from or related thereto. 20. INSURANCE Without limiting Vendor's indemnification of City, and prior to commencement of work, Vendor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of this Agreement, a policy or policies of liability insurance of the type and amounts described below and in a form satisfactory to City. A. Certificates of Insurance. Vendor shall provide certificates of insurance with original endorsements to City as evidence of the insurance coverage required herein. Insurance certificates must be approved by City's Risk Manager prior to commencement of performance or issuance of any permit. Current certification of insurance shall be kept on file with City at all times during the term of this Agreement. B. Signature. A person authorized by the insurer to bind coverage on its behalf shall sign certification of all required policies. C. Acceptable Insurers. All insurance policies shall be issued by an insurance company currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner Page 18 to transact business of insurance in the State of California, with an assigned policyholders' AM Best "A" rated category and Financial Size Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance with the latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide, unless otherwise approved by the City's Risk Manager. D. Coverage Requirements. Workers' Compensation Coverage. Vendor shall maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance for his or her employees in accordance with the laws of the State of California. In addition, Vendor shall require each subcontractor to similarly maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance in accordance with the laws of the State of California for all of the subcontractor's employees. Any notice of cancellation or non -renewal of all Workers' Compensation policies must be received by City at least thirty (30) calendar days (10 calendar days written notice of non-payment of premium) prior to such change. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against City, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers for losses arising from work performed by Vendor for City. ii. General Liability Coverage. Vendor shall maintain commercial general liability insurance in an amount not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury, and property damage, including without limitation, contractual liability. If commercial general liability insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to the work to be performed under this Agreement, or the general aggregate limit shall be at least twice the required occurrence limit. iii. Automobile Liability Coverage. Vendor shall maintain automobile insurance covering bodily injury and property damage for all activities of the Vendor arising out of or in connection with work to be performed under this Agreement, including coverage for any owned, hired, non -owned or rented vehicles, in an amount not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit for each occurrence. E. Endorsements. Each general liability and automobile liability insurance policy shall be endorsed with the following specific language: Page 19 The City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds with respect to liability arising out of work performed by or on behalf of the Vendor. ii. This policy shall be considered primary insurance as respects to City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers as respects to all claims, losses, or liability arising directly or indirectly from the Vendor's operations or services provided to City. Any insurance maintained by City, including any self-insured retention City may have, shall be considered excess insurance only and not contributory with the insurance provided hereunder. iii. This insurance shall act for each insured and additional insured as though a separate policy had been written for each, except with respect to the limits of liability of the insuring company. iv. The insurer waives all rights of subrogation against City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers. V. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents or volunteers. vi. The insurance provided by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or in limits, by either party except after thirty (30) calendar days (10 calendar days written notice of non-payment of premium) written notice has been received by City. F. Timely Notice of Claims. Vendor shall give City prompt and timely notice of claim made or suit instituted arising out of or resulting from Vendor's performance under this Agreement. G. Additional Insurance. Vendor shall also procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, any additional kinds of insurance, which in its own judgment may be necessary for its proper protection and prosecution of the work. 21. CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP Vendor agrees that if there is a change or transfer in ownership of Vendor's business prior to completion of this Agreement, the new owners shall be required under terms of sale or other transfer to assume Vendor's duties and obligations contained in this Agreement and complete them to the satisfaction of City. Page 110 22. FORCE MAJEURE Vendor shall not be assessed with liquidated damages or unsatisfactory performance penalties during any delay beyond the time named for the performance of this Agreement caused by any act of God, war, civil disorder, employment strike or other cause beyond its reasonable control, provided that Vendor gives written notice of the cause of the delay to City within 36 hours of the start of the delay and Vendor avails himself of any available remedies. 23. CONFIDENTIALITY Vendor agrees to maintain the confidentiality of all City and City -related records and information pursuant to all statutory laws relating to privacy and confidentiality that currently exist or exist at any time during the term of this Agreement. All such records and information shall be considered confidential and kept confidential by Vendor and Vendor's staff, agents and employees. 24. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Vendor represents and warrants that services to be provided under this Agreement shall fully comply, at Vendor's expense, with all standards, laws, statutes, restrictions, ordinances, requirements, and regulations (collectively "laws"), including, but not limited to those issued by City in its governmental capacity and all other laws applicable to the services at the time services are provided to and accepted by City. Vendor acknowledges that City is relying on Vendor to ensure such compliance, and pursuant to the requirements of paragraph 17 above, Vendor agrees that it shall defend, indemnify and hold City and Indemnified Parties harmless from all liability, damages, costs and expenses arising from or related to a violation of such laws. 25. FREIGHT (F.O.B. DESTINATION) Vendor assumes full responsibility for all transportation, transportation scheduling, packing, handling, insurance, and other services associated with delivery of all products deemed necessary under this Agreement. 26. TERMS AND CONDITIONS Vendor acknowledges that it has read and agrees to all terms and conditions included in this Agreement. 27. SEVERABILITY If any term, covenant, condition or provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, the remainder of the provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect and shall in no way be affected, impaired or invalidated thereby. Page 111 28. ATTORNEYS FEES In any action or proceeding to enforce or interpret any provision of this Agreement, or where any provision hereof is validly asserted as a defense, each party shall bear its own attorney's fees, costs and expenses. 29. EXECUTION AND COUNTERPARTS This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original Agreement, and all of which shall constitute one Agreement. These counterparts may be transmitted by facsimile or e-mail with the originals to be thereafter provided by the Parties. Such facsimiles or e-mail shall be deemed original signatures. 30. SIGNATORIES AUTHORITY Each and every one of the persons executing this Agreement expressly warrants that he or she is authorized to do so on behalf of the entity for which he or she is executing this Agreement. The City and Vendor represent and warrant that this Agreement is executed voluntarily, with full knowledge of its significance. Page 112 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed on the day and year first written above. APPROVED AS TO FORM: OFFICE OF THE CITY ATTORNEY ynett euc mp, Assistant City A#6rney ATTEST: By: 0�1 (W- , Nk' Leilani I. Brown, City Clerk Attachments: ;L-'FORN`i Exhibit A — Exhibit B-1 — Exhibit B-2 — CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH, A Municipal Corporation By: 4 Keith D. Curry, Mayor City of Newport Beach VENDOR: Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. Title: 'IN fec\uL �p Print Name: L.1 Z._ pans B. (Ffiri6cialOfficer) Title:7(-yAA,u W' At Aur, -)n Print Name: Pricing Page Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and Warranty Details: Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumper Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and Warranty Details: One Pierce Tractor -drawn Arial Ladder Exhibit C — Performance Bond „��(irr�►:1 � — � n`.i U. r cz n c r' �(P � 10 �'� S_.� Page 113 EXHIBIT A Exhibit A Month 0 1 4 6 7 8 9 Date of Delivery 10* Total Cash Flows Net Present Value (NPV) Proposed Total Price Less: Discount Sales Tax Total Cost 20% Down Option CF Engines CF Ladder Total (192,004) (840,802) (198,225) (868,599) (390,229) (1,709,402) (1,032,806) (1,066,824) (2,099,631) (1,022,368) (1,056,041) (2,078,409) 960,019 991,125 1,951,144 (10,312) (10,137) (20,449) 83,099 85,836 168,936 1,032,806 1,066,824 2,099,631 *Amounts include Sales Tax of 8.75% August 31, 2009 City of Newport Beach PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER:' 3300 Newport Blvd. Newport Beach, CA 92658 Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you, for final acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton, Wisconsin, the apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices. Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumpers mounted on Arrow XT chassis as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of .................................$ 935,019.00 If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00 for both pumpers. Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed as per fire department locations.......................................................... 25,000.00 Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 960,019.00 If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100% performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $44,468.00. Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount. Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within about 9-10 months after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered to you at Newport Beach, California. The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus. The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of initial purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any increased costs incurred by the first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above. Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition. The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale. PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC. By: Jay W. Bressler Sales Representative August 31, 2009 City of Newport Beach PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER' 3300 Newport Blvd. Newport Beach, CA 92658 Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you, for final acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton, Wisconsin, the apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices. One (1) Pierce 100' Heavy Duty Tiller mounted on an Arrow XT chassis as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of ............................................$ 966,125.00 If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00. Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed as per fire department locations................................................................... 25,000.00 Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 991,125.00 If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100% performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $49,467.00. Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount. Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within about9-10 months after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered to you at Newport Beach, California. The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus. The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of initial purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any increased costs incurred by the first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above. Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition. The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale. PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC. By: Jay W. Bressler Sales Representative EXHIBIT B-1 We are pleased to submit a proposal to the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH for Two (2) Pierce® 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumper. The following paragraphs will describe in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not specifically requested will not be provided. PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building bodies with one philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over 50 years of experience in the fire apparatus market. Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over 757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A multi-million dollar inventory of parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory. QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning. We currently have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards that we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce. Another part of this program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Welding Society Inspector to monitor our weld quality. DELIVERY The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper break-in of all components while the apparatus is still under warranty. INFORMATION At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle. SAFETY VIDEO At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39 -minute, professionally -produced apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis operation, pump operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance. PERFORMANCE TESTS A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten (10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle, and not less than 50% nor more than 75% on the rear axle. Page 1 of 96 ISO COMPLIANCE Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001. These standards sponsored by the "International Organization for Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the certificate of compliance Number 32454 is included with this proposal. SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our headquarters, all chassis, cab and body systems are engineered, tested, and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. Pierce® vehicles are also backed by a network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the fire service who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service, and training. Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability, maintainability, performance, and a high level of quality. NFPA 2009 STANDARDS This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions. Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be supplied with delivery of the apparatus. A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating. The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff involved with certifications. An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results. NFPA COMPLIANCY Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non-NFPA". TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION The apparatus will be third -party, independent, audit -certified to the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards. The certification includes: all design, production, operational, and performance testing of the apparatus. PUMP TEST The pump will be tested, approved, and certified at the manufacturer's expense. The test Page 2 of 96 results and the pump manufacturer's certification of hydrostatic test; the engine manufacturer's certified brake horsepower curve; and the manufacturer's record of pump construction details will be forwarded to the Fire Department. GENERATOR TEST If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified at the manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the time of delivery. BREATHING AIR TEST If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air system and certify that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. INSPECTION TRIP(S) The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for for a total of twelve customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the bidder. CUSTOMER SERVICE WEBSITE The Pierce Customer Service website will provide the dealer and customer access to comprehensive information pertaining to the maintenance and service of the apparatus. The website will consist of the following screens: My Fleet Screen The My Fleet screen will provide access to truck detail information on the major components of the vehicle, warranty information, available vehicle photographs, vehicle drawings, sales options, applicable vehicle software downloads, etc. Parts Screens The Parts screens will provide parts look -up capability of Pierce Manufacturing sourced items, with the aid of digital photographs, part drawings and assembly drawings. The parts search application will permit the searching of parts by item description or function group (major system category). The parts application will provide the ability to submit electronically a parts order, parts quote, or parts return request directly to Pierce Manufacturing for processing. Warranty Screen The Warranty screens will provide dealers the ability to submit electronically warranty claims directly to Pierce Manufacturing for reimbursement. My Reports Screens The My Reports screens will provide access to multiple dealer reports to allow the dealership to maintain communication with the customer on the status of orders, claims, and phone contacts. Page 3 of 96 Technical Support Screens The Technical Support screens will provide access to all currently published Operation and Maintenance and Service Publications. Access to Pierce Manufacturing Service Bulletins and Work Instructions, containing information on current service topics and recommendations will be provided. Traininq The Training screens will provide access to upcoming training classes offered by Pierce Manufacturing. Interactive electronic learning modules (Operators Guides) covering the operation of major vehicle components will be provided. Access to training manuals used in Pierce Manufacturing training classes will be provided. About Pierce Access to Customer Service Articles, Corporate News, Quarterly Newsletters, and Key Contacts within the Customer Service Department will be provided. The current Customer Service Policy and Procedure Manual, detailing the operation of the Customer Service group will also be accessible. The Search screen will provide search access for terms used on the website. The customer will have limited access specific to their vehicle. MAXIMUM OVERALL HEIGHT The maximum overall height of the apparatus will be 111 inches. MAXIMUM OVERALL LENGTH The maximum overall length of the apparatus will be 360 inches. APPROVAL DRAWING A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc. A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing. DRAWING. PUMP OPERATOR'S PANEL A detailed drawing to scale of the pump operator's panel will be provided for approval prior to construction. This drawing will include all of the gauges and controls located on the pump operator's panel. Page 4 of 96 WARRANTY The following warranty will be supplied with each bidders proposal and printed on the company letterhead. We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, as the company may elect, any parts thereof which are returned to us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to which examination is disclose to the company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such part, or parts will be returned to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or parts will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the original purchaser. This warranty will not apply: 1) To normal maintenance and adjustments. 2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way so that, in our judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse, neglect, or accident, nor to any vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory rated load capacity. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others representations to the original purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including liability for incidental or consequential damages on the part of the company. We neither assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty or liability on the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company. CROSSMEMBERS WARRANTY A one (1) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers. PERFORMANCE BOND A performance bond will rpt be included. If requested, the following will apply: conu On The successful bidder will provide, within thirty (sn) :f:er gra"da^ra of contract, a performance bond, which guarantees performance of all terms and conditions of the contract and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the performance of the contract according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by the U.S. Treasury Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of the bid date. The performance bond will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent to, the date of the contract. Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will apply only to the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle. Any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that Page 5 of 96 are included within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the warranties (if any) of any third party of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into or attached to the vehicle. I --19 Will . Page 6 of 96 ARROW -XT TM CHASSIS The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy-duty service, with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy-duty line tilt cab. SEATING CAPACITY The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4). WHEELBASE The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 174.5 inches. GVW RATING The gross vehicle weight rating will be 42,000 lbs. FRAME The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 inch -pounds over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 inch -pounds over the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat-treated .38" thick steel, with 3.50" wide flanges. FRAME RAIL WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of 50 years, which is the estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its chassis frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. FRAME REINFORCEMENT In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat-treated steel measuring 12.00" x 3.00" x .25". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu. in., Page 7 of 96 yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of 857,462 inch -pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976,502 pounds per rail. The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge of the mainframe rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember. FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE The Oshkosh TAK-40 front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 19,500 pounds. Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of 100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile iron. The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel. Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations. There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering gear extension. The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load. Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life. The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life. Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided. The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle. The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle wheelbase. The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle. WARRANTY, FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE The Oshkosh TAK-4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This Page 8 of 96 warranty applies to the TAK-4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps etc., are covered under our standard chassis warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering for warranty). OIL SEALS Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle. SHOCK ABSORBERS Heavy-duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension. REAR AXLE The rear axle will be a Meritor TM, Model RS -24-160, with a capacity of 24,000 pounds. REAR AXLE WARRANTY The Meritor TM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided with this axle. TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH. OIL SEALS Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle. FRONT SUSPENSION Front Oshkosh TAK-4 TM independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 19,500 pounds. The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment. Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension. The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms. The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. One can adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side. The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving. REAR SUSPENSION The rear springs will be Standens semi -elliptical, 3.00" x 52.00", 10 leaves with a ground Page 9 of 96 rating of 24,000 pounds. Castings will be used for spring hangers with provisions for lubrication. The grease fittings will be 90 -degree type and will be accessible without removing the wheels or cutting any sheet metal. The two (2) top leaves will wrap the forward spring hanger pin and the top leaf will wrap the rear spring hanger pin on both the front and rear suspensions. Kaiser spring pins will be provided, with double "figure-eight' grease grooves and a layer of electroless nickel plating, 1.0 mil thick, around the entire pin. The bushing that holds the spring pin in place will also have a grease groove. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco 4S4M, anti-lock braking system. The ABS will provide a four (4) channel anti-lock braking control on both the front and rear wheels. A digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti-lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti- lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from skidding out of control. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY The Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,000 mile parts and labor warranty provided by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems. BRAKES The service brake system will be full air type. The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance. The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance. The rear brakes will be Meritor TM 16.50" x 7.00" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters. ENGINE BRAKE A Jacobs Engine Brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of the driver. The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high and low setting. The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake lights are activated. The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required Page 10 of 96 AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM The air compressor will be a Cummins/Wabco with 18.7 cubic feet per minute output. BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system will include: - Bendix-Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface - One heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer - Total air system capacity of 4,362 cubic inches - Two (2) air pressure gauges with red warning light and audible alarm, that activates when air pressure falls below 60 psi - MGM spring set parking brake system - Parking brake operated by a Bend ix -Westinghouse PP -1 control valve - A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel - Bend ix -Westing house SR -1 valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, will provide an automatic spring -brake application at 40 psi - Bendix AD -9 air dryer with heater BRAKE LINES Wire braided reinforced rubber brake lines will be provided for the chassis air brake system, up to the individual line coupler fittings, located in the chassis frame near the cab lock down. The coupler fittings will be the separation point for all air lines going to the front of the chassis and into the cab. The only wire braided lines forward of the coupler fittings are the front brake lines that run from the QR1 valve to the front air chambers. The air lines going into the cab will be nylon, wrapped in loom. The area where the nylon air lines run will be well protected inside the frame rails The brake lines will not be painted. AIR INLET One (1) air inlet with male coupling will be provided. It will allow station air to be supplied to the apparatus brake system through a shoreline hose. The inlet will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab. A check valve will be provided to prevent reverse flow of air. The inlet will discharge into the "wet" tank of the brake system. A mating female coupling Page 11 of 96 will also be provided with the loose equipment. AIR TANK, ADDITIONAL An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the capacity of the air system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use. The output flow of the engine air compressor varies with engine RPM. Full compressor output is only achieved at governed engine speed. Engine speed may be limited by generators, pumps and other PTO driven options. MANUAL MOISTURE EJECTOR(S) Four (4) manual moisture ejectors will be installed in the brake system. The moisture ejector will be remote mounted on the driver side of vehicle, as close to the edge of vehicle as possible. A loop will be provided at the moisture ejector, to allow for ease of pulling the drain. Each moisture ejector will have a label directly under the ejector, stating air tank drain. Nylon tubing, .38" diameter will be routed from the air tank to the moisture ejector. The nylon tubing will be cover with protective split loom. The moisture ejector(s) will be provided on the primary, reserve and extra reservoirs(s). ENGINE The chassis will be powered by a Cummins electronic engine as described below: - Model: ISL - Number of Cylinders: Six (6) - Bore and Stroke: 4.49" x 5.69" - Displacement: 543 cubic inches - Maximum Horsepower: 370 hp at 2100 rpm - Torque: 1200 Ib -ft at 1300 rpm - Compression Ratio: 16.6:1 - Governed rpm: 2200 Standard equipment on the engine will include the following: - Air Cleaner: Farr or equal - Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve, integrated water separator, and water in fuel sensor - Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut off valves on the supply and return line - Governor: Limiting speed type Page 12 of 96 - Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip - Lube Oil Cooler Lube Oil Filter: Full flow Starting Motor: 12 -volt Turbocharger Charge Air Cooled Priming Pump ENGINE WARRANTY The engine will have a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by Cummins. This warranty will provide the same coverage for the Diesel Particulate Filter "DPF" that is an integral component of the exhaust emissions system. Cummins will add a $100.00 deductible during the extended basic coverage period in years 3, 4, and 5. There will be no deductible in the first 2 years of warranty. CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS The following amber indicator lights will be located on the driver's side of the cab to denote engine information: - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) - High Exhaust Temperature (HET) A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the driver's side instrument panel. ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the time of delivery. ENGINE AIR INTAKE The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch. EXHAUST SYSTEM The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate filter and will be 4.00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter and a diesel oxidation catalyst to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to Page 13 of 96 reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will be provided on the exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab. Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe diffuser. FUEL SEPARATOR The engine will be equipped with a Racor in-line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition to the engine fuel filters. HIGH IDLE A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activation/deactivation. The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Engage High Idle". COOLANT LINES Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant/heater lines installed by Pierce Manufacturing. Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will expand and contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a constant clamping pressure on the hose. RADIATOR The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling system standards. For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented "Beta -Weld" process for increased strength, longer road life and solder - bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial antifreeze solutions. The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators. The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with a remote -mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a built-in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap. Page 14 of 96 A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system. A heavy-duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator. CLUTCH FAN A Horton fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in "Road" and "Pump" position. FUEL TANK A 65 -gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at the rear of the chassis. The tank will be constructed of 12 -gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a vent. A .75" drain plug will be located in a low point of the tank for drainage. A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side of the body and is covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel Only". A .50" diameter vent will be installed from tank top to just below fuel fill inlet. The fuel tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95% of tank volume. All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer FUEL COOLER An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line. The fuel filler cap will have a retaining chain. LABEL, FUEL DOOR There will be a label provided, on the fuel door, to read "Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Only". AUXILIARY FUEL PICKUP A auxiliary fuel pickup will be provided in the chassis fuel tank. TRANSMISSION An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 3000P, electronic torque converting automatic transmission will be provided. Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock). A transmission temperature gauge with red light and audible alarm will be installed on the cab dash. Page 15 of 96 TRANSMISSION SHIFTER A six (6) -speed T -Handle shift module with the 4 + 2 "Mode" button will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation. The Allison shifter will be a "double-digit" display model. The transmission ratio will be: 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00, 5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00. TRANSMISSION COOLER A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator. TRANSMISSION WARRANTY The transmission will have a five (5) year/unlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission. Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your Allison transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for coverage limitations. DRIVELINE Drivelines will be a heavy-duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer 1710 universal joints. The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation. A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft, slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat or equivalent. STEERING Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy-duty power steering, will be provided. The power steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3) -line hydraulic pump with integral pressure and flow control. The steering wheel will be: - 18.00" in diameter - Capable of tilting and telescoping - Four (4) -spoke design STEERING WARRANTY The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. TIRES The front tires will be Michelin 385/65R22.5 radials, 18 ply "Hiway Rib" XFE tread. The tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten (10) stud, 11.25" bolt circle. Page 16 of 96 Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 11 R22.50 radials, 16 ply all -season XDN2 tread. The tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 8.25" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10) - stud 11.25" bolt circle. LUG NUT COVERS Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts. WHEEL CHOCKS There will be one (1) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44-E, aluminum alloy, Quick -Choc wheel blocks, with easy -grip handle provided. WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS There will be one (1) set(s) of Ziamatic SQCH-44-H horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for the Ziamatic SAC -44-E folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be mounted one fore and aft of the rear wheels on the driver's side. HUB COVERS (front) Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the front axle. An oil level viewing window will be provided. HUB COVERS (rear) Stainless steel baby moon covers will be provided over the rear axle hubs. LUG NUT COVERS Stainless steel lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts. MUD FLAPS Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels. SPARE TIRE A 315/80R22.50, spare tire to match the vehicle's front tires will be provided, mounted on a polished aluminum disc wheel. SPARE TIRE A spare tire, 11 R22.5, 16 ply, to match the vehicle's rear tires will be provided, mounted on a polished aluminum disc wheel. TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of six (6) tires. The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi. Page 17 of 96 Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking. CAB The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by Pierce Manufacturing. Construction of the cab will consist of 5052-H32 .125" aluminum welded to extruded aluminum framing. The cab will be built by Pierce Manufacturing within our own facility located on our premises. The cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50". The overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) will be approximately 103.00". The overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension will increase the overall height listed. The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 54.00" in the center and 59.75" in the outboard positions. The crew cab floor will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel. The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the back wall. The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the same manner as the driver and passenger doors. The cab will be a full tilt cab style. The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist. The cab will have three (3) -point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump connected to two (2) cab lift cylinders. The cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic locking mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered. The cab access steps will be 23.25" wide, crew cab will be 21.25" wide x 8.00" minimum depth and will be the half -height style door, blistered inward at the bottom. The lower exposed step area at each door location will be trimmed with aluminum treadplate and have a grip strut insert in the bottom step. The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high Page 18 of 96 The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access. A 20.00", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist entrance into the cab. A chrome handrail will be provided on the inside each front cab door, for ease of entry. The cab doors openings will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high. The crew cab door openings will be 34.25" wide x 57.00" high for easy entry, and located on the side of the cab. The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of .125". The exterior skins will be constructed from .090" aluminum. All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window. Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of the cab doors. All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles. The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed. The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin. There will be double automotive type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to ensure a weather tight fit. Full height polished stainless steel scuffplates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors. Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms. Engine hood side walls will be constructed of .50" aluminum, top will be constructed of .19" aluminum and will be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room. The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the DBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet. There will be access, 15.00" wide x 11.25" high at the rear of the engine tunnel to access the engine fluid checks. Full circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided. Page 19 of 96 Bright aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered. A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area. The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place. All cab glass will be tinted. Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers. Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75" x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab. Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE requirements. The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab. A glove box with a drop-down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position. CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below: - European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29 - SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi -Static Loading Heavy Trucks - SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks - Roof Crush The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of the ECE 29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10 metric tons. - Side Impact The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 Ib moving barrier is slammed into the side of the cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft -lbs of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident. - Frontal Impact The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft -lbs of energy using a swing - Page 20 of 96 bob type platen The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant area. CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear. CAB MODIFICATION The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required clearance to the engine and related components. The engine tunnel will include a modification on the passenger side to accommodate the Turbo and related components. CAB FLOOR The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with PolydampTm acoustical floor mat consisting of a black pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler. The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which offer a superior grip surface. Additionally, the material has a .25" thick closed cell foam (no water absorption) which offers a sound dampening material for reducing sound levels. CREW CAB WINDOWS On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided. The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 11.29" wide x 17.95" high. WINDOW TINT Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are included: - Crew cab side windows Crew cab door, roll -up windows - Rear opera windows (if applicable) SHELVING There will be two (2) shelves provided in the EMS compartment. Each shelf will be constructed of 0.090" aluminum with a 1.25" up -turned lip. Shelving will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded tightener sliding in a track. The location will be in the EMS compartment Page 21 of 96 ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush mounted automotive style switches. The driver's side lower instrument panel will also have three (3) controls, officer's door window and both crew cab door windows. ELECTRIC WINDOW DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Cab window roll -up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long service life. The window regulator design will complete 30,000 complete up -down cycles and still function normally when finished. The bidder will certify that sample doors and windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without malfunction or significant component wear. LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON HORN BUTTON The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the fire apparatus manufacturer's logo and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, eleven (11) characters in the second row and eleven (11) characters in the third row. The first row of text will be: Newport The second row of text will be: Beach The third row of text will be: Fire Dept SUNVISORS Two (2) vinyl sunvisors will be provided, one (1) above each windshield. FENDER CROWNS Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender crowns will have a radius outside corner that will allow the fender crown to extend out further than the standard width crown, thus extending beyond the sidewall of the front tires and allow the crew cab doors to open fully. CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS A brushed stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and crew cab doors. STRIPE (On Paint Break) There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The stripe will be on both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield. MAP BOX A map box with three (3) bins, open from top, will be installed on the center dash. The map box will be divided into three (3) bins, each being 12.00" wide x 4.00" deep x 8.00" high. The map box will be constructed of .125" aluminum and will be painted to match the cab Page 22 of 96 interior MAP POCKET Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13.50" wide x 14.00" high x 1.50" deep and constructed of stainless steel. CAB LIFT A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves. The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure. Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a convenient location. In addition to the panel controls, a 15' remote control will be provided for raising and lowering the cab. The remote control will be stored in the cab. The receptacle for the remote control will be located next to the master controls on the panel. Cab will be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring-loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered. The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position. A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully raised. Before lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control located near the cab raise/lower switch. INTERLOCK, CAB LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the parking brake is released the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled. MIRRORS Ramco, model #6001 CCR, polished aluminum 9.25" x 13.50" mirrors, with a convex section, will be mounted on each side of the front cab corner. The flat glass in each mirror will be adjustable with remote controls that are convenient to the driver. The convex section in each mirror will be adjusted manually. BUMPER A one (1) piece, ten (10) gauge, 304-213 type polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of 10.00" high, will be attached to a bolted modular extension frame constructed of 50,000 psi tensile steel "C" channel mounted directly behind it to provide adequate support strength. Page 23 of 96 The bumper will be extended 16.00" from front face of cab. Documentation will be provided, upon request to show that the options selected have been engineered for fit -up and approval for this modular bumper extension. A chart will be provided to indicate the option locations and will include, but not be limited to the following options: air horns, mechanical sirens, speakers, hose trays (with hose capacities), winches, lights, discharge, and suction connections. LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems. The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame. HOSE TRAY A hose tray, constructed of aluminum, will be placed in the center of the bumper extension. The tray will have a capacity of 20' of 5.00" double jacket cotton -polyester hose. Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes are also provided. GRAVEL PAN A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face. The gravel pan will be properly supported from the underside to prevent flexing and vibration of the aluminum treadplate. HOSE HOLD DOWN STRAP There will be one (1) hose tray(s) that will have a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon strap(s), with Velcro fasteners, provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray. TOW HOOKS No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow eyes. CAB INTERIOR The wrap-around style high impact ABS plastic cab dash fascia will be designed to provide unobstructed visibility to instrumentation. The dash layout will provide the driver with a quick reference to gauges that allows more time to focus on the road. The center console will include an easily removable cover for the defroster, two (2) cup holders located one (1) each side at the rear of the console, and two (2) 12 volt power sources (cigar lighter style). The officer side dash and center console will be a flat faced design to provide easy maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum. Page 24 of 96 The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and mildew. The upper door liners will be constructed of an aluminum backing covered with padded upholstry. The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyl. A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling. Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit. CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray. INTERIOR PAINT (Cab) A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture paint. GRAB HANDLE A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the post area between the door and steering wheel column. A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer. DRIVER SEAT A Seats Inc. #911 Magnum 100 "knee -action" air -ride style seat with high -back will be provided in the cab for the driver. The seat will have 3.00" of height adjustment, in addition to the "knee -action" suspension. The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. OFFICER SEAT A Seats Inc. #911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the officer. The officer's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. Page 25 of 96 FORWARD FACING PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab. The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in the up position. The seat will be furnished with a three-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractors. FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew cab. The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in the up position. The seat will be furnished with a three-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractors. EMS COMPARTMENT A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab at the center position. The compartment will be 38.00" wide x 30.00" high x 22.63" deep with two (2) Gortite roll up doors, non-locking, with white finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be approximately 21.00" high x 17.00" wide. The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab interior. COMPARTMENT LIGHT There will be one (1) On Scene Solutions strip light installed on the left side of the compartment opening.. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch. This storage compartment will be compliant per NFPA standard for automotive fire apparatus. RADIO COMPARTMENT A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat. The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high. A drop-down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access. Page 26 of 96 The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior. SEAT UPHOLSTERY All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material. SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT All seating positions furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment. This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefighter. SEAT BELTS All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts. SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 lbs of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria. SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria. SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten (10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab with green and red LED indicators as follows: Seat Occupied Buckled Green Seat Occupied Unbuckled Red No Occupant Buckled Red No Occupant Unbuckled Not Illuminated The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park. HELMET HOLDER There will be four (4) Zico UHH-1 helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The brackets will provide quick access and secure storage of the helmet(s). The bracket location(s) will be determined at time of final inspection at Pierce mfg. Page 27 of 96 AIR BOTTLE MOUNTING BRACKET A total of two (2) 45 degree mounting bracket will be in the crew cab. Each mounting bracket will be designed to hold one (1) Ziamatic SCBA holders The bracket will be mounted on the rear facing seat risors. CAB WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its custom fire and/or rescue vehicle cab are free of defects in design or workmanship in the cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural components identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS Two (2) engine compartment lights will be installed under the engine hood, with an integral switch. The lights will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention. CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of: - Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, red/clear dome light located, one (1) on the officer side and one (1) on the driver side, controlled by the following: Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch. Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch. - Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling. CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of: - Four (4) Weldon, Model 8081, Red/Clear dome lights located two (2) each side, controlled by the following: Clear forward lights controlled by the door switch and the lens switch. Red rearward lights controlled by the lens switch. Page 28 of 96 A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches STEP LIGHTS For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) Ritar, Model M27HW2, LED, step lights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door, one (1) per step, in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep. The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened. CAB DEFROSTER There will be a 41,000 BTU/hr defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel. The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily removable for maintenance. The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows. CAB/CREW CAB HEATER Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU/hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow. The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser. CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems Test Procedure and Performance Requirements - Trucks, Buses, and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE J381 criteria. CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel, whether in -transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE J381. The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria. AIR CONDITIONING An air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab. Page 29 of 96 The system will be centrally mounted on the cab. The air conditioner refrigerant will be R -134A, installed by a certified technician. INTERIOR CAB INSULATION The cab and crew cab walls will be insulated with 2.00" insulation where possible and the roof with 1.00" insulation to aid in cooling. The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal panel painted to match the interior. An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning housing. The light will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements. No change orders will be allowed for this option. This option will be allowed for orders with a 12 month leadtime from the time the order is submitted to Pierce. CAB INSTRUMENTATION The cab instrument panel will consist of gauges, an LCD display, telltale indicator lights, alarms, control switches, and a diagnostic panel. The function of instrument panel controls and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located within the forward cab section directly forward of the driver. Gauges and switch panels will be designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership. GAUGES The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) ivory gauges with chrome bezels to monitor vehicle performance: Voltmeter gauge (Volts) Low volts (11.8 VDC) Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. High volts (15 VDC) Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Very low volts (11.3 VDC) Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Very high volts (16 VDC) Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Tachometer (RPM) Speedometer (Primary (outside) MPH, Secondary (inside) Km/H) Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions) Low fuel (1/8 full) Page 30 of 96 Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Very low fuel (1/32) fuel Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Engine oil pressure gauge (PSI) Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Front air pressure gauge (PSI) Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm. Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Rear air pressure gauge (PSI) Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm. Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Transmission oil temperature gauge (Fahrenheit) High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm. Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. Engine coolant temperature gauge (Fahrenheit) High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarm. Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm. Amber caution light on gauge assembly. All gauges will perform prove out at initial power -up to ensure proper performance. INDICATOR LAMPS To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located above and below the center gauges. The indicator lamps will be "dead -front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have descriptive text or symbols. The following amber telltale lamps will be present: Low coolant Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable) Check engine Check trans (check transmission) Aux brake overheat (Auxiliary brake overheat) Air rest (air restriction) Caution (triangle symbol) Water in fuel DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration) Trailer ABS (where applicable) Wait to start (where applicable) HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable) ABS (antilock brake system) MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable) Page 31 of 96 Side roll fault (where applicable) Front air bag fault (where applicable) The following red telltale lamps will be present: Warning (stop sign symbol) Seat belt Parking brake Stop engine Rack down The following green telltale lamps will be provided: Left turn Right turn Battery on The following blue telltale lamp will be provided: High beam ALARMS Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message is present. Audible pulsing tone caution alarm: A pulsing audible tone alarm (chime/chirp) will be provided whenever a caution message is present without a warning message being present. Alarm silence: Any active audible alarm will be able to be silenced by holding the ignition switch at the top position for 3-5 seconds. For improved safety, silenced audible alarms will intermittently chirp every 30 seconds until the alarm condition no longer exists. The intermittent chirp will act as a reminder to the operator that a caution or warning condition still exists. Any new warning or caution condition will enable the steady or pulsing tones respectively. INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE -OUT A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms located on the cab instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove -out at initial power -up to ensure proper performance. CONTROL SWITCHES For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within easy reach of the driver. Emergency master switch: A molded plastic push button switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. Pressing the switch will activate emergency response lights and siren control. A green lamp on the switch provides indication that the emergency master mode is active. Pressing the switch again disables the emergency master mode. Headlight / Parking light switch: A three (3) -position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate all parking lights and the headlights. The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch position Page 32 of 96 will activate the headlights. Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A three (3) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position decreases the panel backlighting intensity to a minimum level as the switch is held. The second switch position is the default position that does not affect the backlighting intensity. The third switch position increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum level as the switch is held. The following standard controls will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located below the right hand gauges. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications. High idle engagement switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate and deactivate the high idle function when pressed and released. The OK TO ENGAGE HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged. OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement. The following standard controls will be provided adjacent to the cab gauge assembly within easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications. Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained/maintained/momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will disable the Command Zone audible alarm if held for 3-5 seconds. A green indicator lamp will be activated with vehicle ignition. Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation. 4 -way hazard switch: A two (2) position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate the 4 -way hazard switch function. The second switch position will activate the 4 -way hazard function. The switch actuator will be red and includes the international 4 -way hazard symbol. Heater and defroster controls Turn signal arm: A self -canceling turn signal with high beam headlight and windshield wiper/washer controls will be provided. The windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes. Page 33 of 96 Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control valve will be provided. Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the steering wheel. CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to four (4) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to four (4) switch panels in the engine tunnel console facing the driver, up to four (4) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side and up to two (2) switch panels in the engine tunnel console facing the officer. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications. DIAGNOSTIC PANEL A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and located inside the driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a problem exist. The diagnostic panel will include the following: Engine diagnostic port Transmission diagnostic port ABS diagnostic port Roll sensor diagnostic port Command Zone USB diagnostic port Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator) ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator) Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable) Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable) CAB LCD DISPLAY A digital 4 row by 50 character dot matrix display will be integral to the gauge panel. The display will be capable of showing simple graphical images as well as text. The display will be split into three (3) sections. Each section will have a dedicated function. The upper left section will display the outside ambient temperature. The upper right section will display odometer, trip mileage, PTO hours, fuel consumption, and other configuration specific information. The bottom section will display INFO, CAUTION, and WARNING messages. Text messages will automatically activate to describe the cause of an audible caution or warning alarm. The LCD will be capable of displaying multiple text messages should more than one caution or warning condition exist. - High Air Restriction Warning Indicator Light: LCD message with amber warning indicator and audible alarm. Page 34 of 96 WIPER CONTROL For simple operation and easy reach, the windshield wiper control will be an integral part of the directional light lever located on the steering column. The wiper control will include high and low wiper speed settings, a one (1) speed intermittent wiper control with six (6) second interval and windshield washer switch. The control will have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to re -turn to the stored position when the wipers are not in use. WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE J198 Windshield Wiper Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met these criteria. - A dash mounted air restriction gauge will be provided, in the cab instrument panel. The gauge will be a Farr, model 3781-325, filter minder with black bezel. - Officer Speedometer, A Class I digital display speedometer will be provided on the officer side overhead position. RADIO WITH CD PLAYER A Panasonic AM/FM/Weatherband stereo radio with compact disc player will be installed. The compact disc stereo radio will be mounted in switch panel per layout. The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (1) pair of 5.25' speakers located in the cab. The type and location of the antenna will be a roof -mounted rubber antenna located in an open space, on the cab roof. This radio will be installed without remote control. RADIO ANTENNA MOUNTS There will be six (6) antenna -mounting bases, model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and weatherproof cap provided for a two-way radio or cell phone installation. One (1) of the mounts will be located on the cab roof, just to the rear of the officer seat and the additional mount(s) will be located directly to the left, in the following positions cab roof. The cables will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for the customer to route to the instrument panel if needed. SWITCH PANELS The emergency light switch panel will have a master switch for ease of use plus individual switches for selective control. Each switch panel will contain eight (8) membrane -type switches each rated for one million (1,000,000) cycles. Panels containing less than eight (8) Page 35 of 96 switch assignments will include non-functioning black appliques. Documentation will be provided by the manufacturer indicating the rated cycle life of the switches. The switch panel(s) will be located in the "overhead" position above the windshield on the driver side overhead to allow for easy access. The switches will be membrane -type and also act as an integral indicator light. For quick, visual indication the entire surface of the switch will be illuminated white whenever backlighting is activated and illuminated red whenever the switch is active. For ease of use, a 2 -ply, scratch resistant laser engraved Gravoply label indicating the use of each switch will be placed in the center of the switch. The label will allow light to pass through the letters for ease of use in low light conditions. ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM The primary power distribution will be located forward of the officer's seating position and be easily accessible while standing on the ground for simplified maintenance and troubleshooting. Additional electrical distribution centers will be provided throughout the vehicle to house the vehicle's electrical power, circuit protection, and control components. The electrical distribution centers will be located strategically throughout the vehicle to minimize wire length. For ease of maintenance, all electrical distribution centers will be easily accessible. All distribution centers containing fuses, circuit breakers and/or relays will be easily accessible. Distribution centers located throughout the vehicle will contain battery powered studs for supplying customer installed equipment thus providing a lower cost of ownership. Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standards, will be utilized to protect electrical circuits. All circuit protection devices will be rated per NFPA requirements to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General protection circuit breakers will be Typed automatic reset (continuously resetting). When required, automotive type fuses will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Control relays and solenoid will have a direct current rating of 125% of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected per NFPA. COMMAND ZONE CONTROL SYSTEM A solidstate electronics based control system will be utilized to achieve advanced operation and control of the vehicle components. A fully computerized vehicle network will consist of electronic modules located near their point of use to reduce harness lengths and improve reliability. The control system will comply with SAE J1939-11 recommended practices. The control system will operate as a master -slave system whereas the main control module instructs all other system components. The system will contain patented Mission Critical software that maintains critical vehicle operations in the unlikely event of a main controller error. The system will utilize a Real Time Operating System (RTOS) fully compliant with OSEKNDXTM specifications providing a lower cost of ownership. For increased reliability and simplified use the control system modules will include the following attributes: Page 36 of 96 Green LED indicator light for module power Red LED indicator light for network communication stability status Control system self test at activation and continually throughout vehicle operation No moving parts due to transistor logic Software logic control for NFPA mandated safety interlocks and indicators Integrated electrical system load management without additional components Integrated electrical load sequencing system without additional components Customized control software to this vehicle's configuration Factory and field reprogrammable to accommodate changes to the vehicles operating parameters Complete operating and troubleshooting manuals USB connection to the main control module for advanced troubleshooting To assure long life and operation in a broad range of environmental conditions, the Command Zone control system modules will meet the following specifications: Module circuit board will meet SAE J771 specifications. Operating temperature from -40C to +70C Storage temperature from -40C to +70C Vibration to 50g IP67 rated enclosure (Totally protected against dust and also protected against the effect of temporary immersion between 15 centimeters and 1 meter) Operating voltage from 8 volts to 16 volts DC The main controller will activate status indicators and audible alarms designed to provide warning of problems before they become critical. CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM Copies of all job -specific, computer network input and output (1/0) connection will be provided with each chassis. The Sheets will indicate the function of each module connection point, circuit protection information (where applicable), wire numbers, wire colors and load management information. ON -BOARD ADVANCED/VISUAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The on -board information center will include the following diagnostic information: Text description of active warning or caution alarms Simplified warning indicators Amber caution light with intermittent alarm Red warning light with steady tone alarm All control system modules, with the exception of the main control module, will contain on- board visual diagnostic LEDs that assist in troubleshooting. The LEDs will be enclosed within the sealed, transparent module housing near the face of the module. One LED for each input or output will be provided and will illuminate whenever the respective input or output is active. Color coded labels within the modules will encompass the LEDs for ease of identification. The LED indicator lights will provide point of use information for reduced troubleshooting time without the need for an additional computer. Page 37 of 96 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS An advanced, Windows-based, diagnostic software program will be provided for this control system. The software will provide troubleshooting tools to service technicians equipped with an IBM compatible computer. The service and maintenance software will be easy to understand and use, have the ability to view system input/output (1/0) information, and include a USB cable for connection from a computer to the vehicle. INDICATOR LIGHT AND ALARM PROVE -OUT SYSTEM A system will be provided which automatically tests basic indicator lights and alarms located on the cab instrument panel. VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM A voltage monitoring system will be provided to indicate the status of the battery system connected to the vehicle's electrical load. The system will provide visual and audible warning when the system voltage is below or above optimum levels. The alarm will activate if the system falls below 11.8 volts DC for more than two (2) minutes. DEDICATED RADIO EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINTS There will be three (3) studs provided in the primary power distribution center located in front of the officer for two-way radio equipment. The studs will consist of the following: 12 -volt 40 -amp battery switched power 12 -volt 60 -amp ignition switched power 12 -volt 60 -amp direct battery power There will also be a 12 -volt 100 -amp ground stud located in or adjacent to the power distribution center. ENHANCED SOFTWARE The Command Zone control system will include the following software enhancements: All perimeter lights and scene lights (where applicable) will be deactivated when the parking brake is released Cab and crew cab dome lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear. Cab and crew cab perimeter lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear. EMI/RFI PROTECTION To prevent erroneous signals from crosstalk contamination and interference, the electrical system will meet, at a minimum, SAE J551/2, thus reducing undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency emissions. An advanced electrical system will be used to insure radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) Page 38 of 96 emissions are suppressed at their source. The apparatus will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically found in fire ground operations to ensure clean operations. The electrical system will meet, without exceptions, electromagnetic susceptibility conforming to SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10KHz-1GHz to 100 Volts/Meter. The vehicle OEM, upon request, will provide EMC testing reports from testing conducted on an entire apparatus and will certify that the vehicle meets SAE J551/2 and SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10KHz- 1GHz to 100 Volts/Meter requirements. Component and partial (incomplete) vehicle testing is not adequate as overall vehicle design can impact test results and thus is not acceptable by itself. EMI/RFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying appropriate circuit designs and shielding. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low-level control signals and high-powered two-way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI/RFI susceptibility. INFORMATION CENTER An information center employing a 7" diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an ABS plastic housing. The information center will have the following specifications: - Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees F - An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens - Five weather resistant user interface switches - Black enclosure with gray decal - Sunlight Readable - Linux operating system - Minimum of 400nits rated display OPERATION The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use. The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion. A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on the LCD. Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will return the information center to the vehicle information screens. A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens. All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed. GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green Page 39 of 96 background will be used. If a caution or warning situation arises the following will occur: - An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition. - A red background/text color will indicate a warning condition. Every screen will include the following: - Exterior Ambient Temperature - Time (12 or 24 hour mode) - Text Alert Center: - The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center messages. - Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have a button label with no text. PAGE SCREENS The Information center will include the following screens: Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will provide: - Description of the load - Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur. - Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed. "At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following devices will be indicated: - Driver Side Cab Door - Passenger's Side Cab Door - Driver Side Crew Cab Door - Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door - Driver Side Body Doors - Passenger's Side Body Doors - Rear Body Door(s) - Ladder Rack (if applicable) - Deck Gun (if applicable) - Light Tower (if applicable) - Hatch Door (if applicable) Page 40 of 96 - Stabilizers (if applicable) - Steps (if applicable) - Any other device that is opened, a hazard or is likely to cause apparatus is moved, will cause parking brake is disengaged. extended, or deployed that creates damage to the apparatus if the an "Alert Center" message if the Chassis Information: The following information will be shown: - Engine RPM - Fuel Level - Battery Voltage - Engine Coolant Temperature - Engine Oil Pressure "At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active text messages. The list items text will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center". The date and time the message occurred is displayed with each message in the list. MENU SCREENS The following screens will be available through the Menu button: View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle information: - Battery Volts - Pump Hours - Transmission Oil Temperature - Pump Engaged - Engine Coolant Level - Engine Oil Level - Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running - Power Steering Level Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness: - Brightness: Increase and decrease - Default setting button Configure Video Mode: - Set Video Contrast - Set Video Color - Set Video Tint Set Startup Screen: - Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up Set Date & Time: - 12 or 24 hour format Page 41 of 96 - Set time - Set date View Active Alarms - Shows a list of all active alarms - Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm - Silence alarms - All alarms are silenced System Diagnostics: - Module type and ID number - Module version - Module diagnostics information: - Input or output number - Circuit number connected to that input or output - Circuit name (item connected to the circuit) - Status of the input or output - Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information Button functions and button labels may change with each screen. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from 8VDC to 16VDC. The VDR will not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications that may exist on the CAN data link during the power up, initialization, runtime, or power down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of power or at voltages below 8VDC for a minimum of 10ms. The vehicle data recorder will be and/or CAN inputs: Vehicle Speed - Acceleration - Deceleration - Engine Speed - Engine Throttle Position - ABS Event - Seat Occupied Status - Seat Belt Buckled Status - Master Optical Warning Device Switch - Time - capable of recording the following data via hardwired Date - MPH MPH/sec MPH/sec RPM % of Full Throttle On/Off Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity) Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity) On/Off 24 Hour Time Year/Month/Day INTERCOM SYSTEM A four (4) position David Clark, Model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at two (2) positions will be provided. Page 42 of 96 - Driver position will have radio interface capability - Officer position will have radio interface capability - Two (2) crew cab positions, located at both forward facing seats, will have intercom only The following components will be supplied with this system: - One (1)-U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew) - One (1)-U3815 Radio Interface Module (Officer) - One (1)-U3811 Radio Interface Modules (Driver) - One (1)-U3805 Radio Cord Junction Module - One (1)-H3441 Single Ear Headset (Driver) -Three (3)-H3442 Headsets (Officer, crew) - One (1)-C3820 Power Cable. - Three (3)-C3821 Radio Interface Cord - One (1)-C3402 Jumper Cord - Two (2)-C38-12 Jumper Cord - Three (3)-18352G-17 MS Connectors - One (1)-09271 P-13 Cable (20 feet) - Four (4) Headset Hangar Hooks All necessary cables and connectors RADIO INTERFACE Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio interface adapter is not required for this application. CAB ROOF COVERING Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and fastening screws will be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum. Front and side warning lights will not be mounted on top of treadplate. The treadplate will extend and terminate next to the warning lights. Page 43 of 96 BATTERY SYSTEM Five (5) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950X1W batteries that include the following features will be provided: - 950 CCA, cold cranking amps - 190 amp reserve capacity - High cycle - Group 31 - Rating of 4750 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit - 950 minutes of reserve capacity - SAE Posts Each battery case will be a black polypropylene material with a vertically ribbed container for increased vibration resistance. The cover will be manifold vented with a central venting location to allow a 45 degree tilt capacity. The inside of each battery will consist of a "maintenance free" grid construction with poly wrapped separators and a flooded epoxy bottom anchoring for maximum vibration resistance. ISOLATED BATTERY One (1) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950XlW battery will be provided for voltage sensitive components. A battery isolator appropriately suited for the group 31 battery capacity will be supplied. BATTERY SYSTEM A single starting system will be provided. An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel. MASTER BATTERY SWITCH A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within easy reach of the driver. An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery system. BATTERY COMPARTMENTS Batteries will be stored in well -ventilated compartments that are located under the cab and bolted directly to the chassis frame. The compartments will include formed fit heavy-duty roto -molded polyethylene battery tray inserts. The batteries will be mounted inside of the roto -molded trays. The battery hold-downs will be of a non -corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel. Heavy-duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be color -coded. Page 44 of 96 Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti -corrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi-permanent rubberized compound. There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals. JUMPER STUDS One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the bottom of the driver's side battery box. This will provide for easy jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for positive/negative terminals. BATTERY CHARGER A Newmar model PT -40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A bar graph indicating the state of charge will be included. The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the batteries. The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the power is connected. Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted high in the compartment. The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser. ALTERNATOR A Leece-Neville, model 4890JB, alternator will be provided. It will have a rated output current of 320 amps, as measured by SAE method J56. The alternator will feature an integral, self diagnostic regulator and rectifier. The alternator will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy-duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator output. SPARE CIRCUIT There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate two in the center dash and one on the officer's side and one at the rear. Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover. Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set. Page 45 of 96 SPARE CIRCUIT There will be one (1) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate to be determined. Termination will be with heat shrinkable butt splicing. The circuits selected above will be controlled by a switch in the following locations: a switch in the driver's side switch panel no additional switch location Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGER An electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12 -volt electrical system, automatically reducing the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition, and automatically restoring the shed electrical loads when a low voltage condition expires. This ensures the integrity of the electrical system. For improved reliability and ease of use, the load manager system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load management tasks. Load management systems which require additional components will not be allowed. The system will include the following features: System voltage monitoring. A shed load will remain inactive for a minimum of five minutes to prevent the load from cycling on and off. Sixteen available electronic load shedding levels. Priority levels can be set for individual outputs. High Idle will not be controlled by the load manager. If enabled: "Load Man Hi -Idle On" will display on the information center. Hi -Idle will not activate until 30 seconds after engine start up. Individual switch "on" indicator to flash when the particular load has been shed. The information center indicates system voltage. The information center includes a "Load Manager" screen indicating the following: Load managed items list, with priority levels and item condition. Individual load managed item condition: Page 46 of 96 ON = not shed SHED = shed SEQUENCER A sequencer will be provided that automatically activates and deactivates vehicle loads in a preset sequence thereby protecting the alternator from power surges. This sequencer operation will allow a gradual increase or decrease in alternator output, rather than loading or dumping the entire 12 volt load to prolong the life of the alternator. For improved reliability and ease of use, the load sequencing system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load sequencing tasks. Load sequencing systems which require additional components will not be allowed. Emergency light sequencing will operate in conjunction with the emergency master light switch. When the emergency master switch is activated, the emergency lights will be activated one by one at half -second intervals. Sequenced emergency light switch indicators will flash while waiting for activation. When the emergency master switch is deactivated, the sequencer will deactivate the warning light loads in the reverse order. Sequencing of the following items will also occur, in conjunction with the ignition switch, at half -second intervals: Cab Heater and Air Conditioning Crew Cab Heater (if applicable) Crew Cab Air Conditioning (if applicable) Exhaust Fans (if applicable) Third Evaporator (if applicable) AMP DRAW REPORT The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system. The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following: 1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests. 2) A written load analysis, which will include the following: A) The nameplate rating of the alternator. B) The alternator rating under the conditions specified per: Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per: Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the Page 47 of 96 total connected load E) Each individual intermittent load All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). EXTERIOR LIGHTING Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at time of proposal. Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim housing. The LED directional lights will wrap-around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The headlight and LED directional lights will be in the same assembly. Five (5) LED clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the cab. WARNING LIGHTS (Cab Face) Four (4) Whelen Model 60*02F*R Super LED lights will be installed on the cab face, above the headlights, mounted in common bezels matching the headlight bezel. The outside flashing LEDs will be red Super LED/red lens. The inside steady burning LEDs will be red Super LED/red lens. All of these lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab. To meet NFPA requirements, the inside lights will be disabled if clear when the parking brake is applied. BACK-UP ALARM An ECCO, Model SA917-PM2, solid-state electronic audible back-up alarm that actuates when the truck is shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels. MANUAL, FIRE APPARATUS PARTS Two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy with the completed unit. One (1) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual. The manual will contain the following: Page 48 of 96 - Job number - Part numbers with full descriptions - Table of contents - Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly - Parts section sorted in Alphabetical order - Instructions on how to locate a parts The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies. SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE The service parts information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website. The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly. MANUALS, CHASSIS SERVICE Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components will be provided with the completed unit. One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual. The manuals will contain the following sections: - Job number - Table of contents - Troubleshooting - Front Axle/Suspension - Brakes - Engine - Tires - Wheels - Cab - Electrical, DC - Air Systems - Plumbing - Appendix The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies. MANUALS, CHASSIS OPERATION Two (2) chassis operation manuals will be provided. Page 49 of 96 One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual. COMMAND ZONE WARRANTY The Command Zone modules, membrane switches, and display(s) will be warranted against defective materials or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. The warranty will also include a standard repair time for covered components. A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid. ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be provided. Page 50 of 96 WATER TANK Booster tank will have a capacity of 500 gallons and be constructed of polypropylene plastic by United Plastic Fabricating, Incorporated. Tank joints and seams will be nitrogen welded inside and out. Tank will be baffled in accordance with NFPA bulletin 1901 requirements. Baffles will have vent openings at both the top and bottom to permit movement of air and water between compartments. Longitudinal partitions will be constructed of .38" polypropylene plastic and will extend from the bottom of the tank through the top cover to allow for positive welding. Transverse partitions will extend from 4.00" off the bottom of the tank to the underside of the top cover. All partitions will interlock and will be welded to the tank bottom and sides. Tank top will be constructed of .50" polypropylene. It will be recessed .38" and will be welded to the tank sides and the longitudinal partitions. Tank top will be sufficiently supported to keep it rigid during fast filling conditions. Construction will include 2.00" polypropylene dowels spaced no more than 30.00" apart and welded to the transverse partitions. Two (2) of the dowels will be drilled and tapped (50" diameter, 13.00" deep) to accommodate lifting eyes. A sump that is 8.00" long x 8.00" wide x 6.00" deep will be provided at the bottom of the water tank. Sump will include a drain plug and the tank outlet. Tank will be installed in a fabricated cradle assembly constructed of structural steel. Sufficient crossmembers will be provided to properly support bottom of tank. Crossmembers will be constructed of steel bar channel or rectangular tubing. Tank will "float" in cradle to. avoid torsional stress caused by chassis frame flexing. Rubber cushions, .50" thick x 3.00" wide, will be placed on all horizontal surfaces that the tank rests on. Stops or other provision will be provided to prevent an empty tank from bouncing excessively while moving vehicle. Mounting system will be approved by the tank manufacturer. Page 51 of 96 Fill tower will be constructed of .50" polypropylene and will be a minimum of 8.00" wide x 14.00" long. Fill tower will be furnished with a .25" thick polypropylene screen and a hinged cover. An overflow pipe, constructed of 4.00" schedule 40 polypropylene, will be installed approximately halfway down the fill tower and extend through the water tank and exit to the rear of the rear axle. WATER TANK WARRANTY The tank will have a lifetime warranty. If the tank manufacturer determines that the tank problem has rendered the truck out -of - service, the tank manufacturer will dispatch a service technician WITHIN 48 HOURS (2 DAYS) to repair the tank (This time period is for the United States and Canada only). HOSE BED The hose body will be fabricated of .125"-5052 aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength. The hose body width will be a minimum of 68.00" inside. The interior of the hose bed will be unpainted with a DA finish. The upper and rear edges of side panels will have a double break for rigidity. The upper inside area of the beavertails will be covered with brushed stainless steel to prevent damage to the painted surface when the hose is removed. The flooring of the hose bed will be removable aluminum grating with the top surface corrugated to aid in hose aeration. The grating slats will be a minimum of .50" x 4.50" with spacing between slats for hose ventilation. Hose bed will accommodate 1000' of 3", 1000' of 2.5", 200' of 1.75" and 8" wide for long tools. Three (3) adjustable hosebed dividers will be used to separate the hose. Each divider will be constructed of a .125" brushed aluminum sheet fitted and fastened into a slotted, 1.50" diameter radiused extrusion along the top, bottom, and rear edge. Partition will be fully adjustable by sliding in tracks, located at the front and rear of the hose bed. Divider will be held in place by tightening bolts, at each end. Acorn nuts will be installed on all bolts in the hose bed which have exposed threads. Page 52 of 96 HOSE RESTRAINT The hose in the hosebed will be restrained by black nylon velcro straps at the top of the hosebed and a black nylon web strap netting at the top and rear of the hosebed. The netting will include quick release fasteners. BACKBOARD COMPARTMENT One (1) backboard compartment will be fabricated of bright aluminum treadplate and mounted to the underside of the bright aluminum treadplate hose bed cover, passenger's side. Compartment(s) size will be 76 x 4 x 20 and will have a bright aluminum treadplate drop-down door at the rear. HOSE BED COVER A two (2) section hose bed cover, constructed of .125" bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished. The cover will be hinged with full length stainless steel piano hinge. The sides will be slanted down. The cover will be reinforced so that it can support the weight of a man walking on the cover. If access to water tank fill tower is blocked by the hose bed cover, then a hinged door will be provided in it so that tank may be filled without raising cover doors. Chrome grab handles and gas filled cylinders will be provided to assist in opening and closing the cover. A handrail is provided at the rear, in the center of the support, to assist in opening the cover. RUNNING BOARDS Running boards will be fabricated of .125" bright aluminum treadplate. Each running board will be supported by a welded 2.00" square tubing and channel assembly, which will be bolted to the pump compartment substructure. Running boards will be 12.75" deep and spaced .50" away from the pump panel. A splashguard will be provided above the running board treadplate. TAILBOARD Rear step will also be constructed of .125" bright aluminum treadplate and spaced .50" from the body, as well as supported by a structural steel assembly. The rear tailboard will be 16.00" deep. The exterior side will be flanged down and in. Flanges will not be notched. Entire rear surface between the beavertails will be covered with smooth aluminum. Page 53 of 96 Inside surface of each beavertail in the hose bed area will be covered with stainless steel to protect the paint finish. The remaining inside surface of the beavertails will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. TOW BAR A tow bar will be installed under the tailboard at center of truck. Tow bar will be fabricated of 1.00" CRS bar rolled into a 3.00" radius Tow bar assembly will be constructed of .38" structural angle. When force is applied to the bar, it will be transmitted to the frame rail. Tow bar assembly will be designed and positioned to allow up to a 30 -degree upward angled pull of 17,000 pounds, or a 20,000 -pound straight horizontal pull in line with the centerline of the vehicle. Tow bar design will have been fully tested and evaluated using strain gauge testing and finite element analysis techniques. COMPARTMENTATION Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125", 5052-H32 aluminum with a tensile strength range of 31,000 to 38,000 psi. Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders. Circular fender liners will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance. Compartment flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the compartment door lip. The compartment door opening will be framed by flanging the edges in 1.75' and bending out again .75" to form an angle. Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion, formed bright aluminum treadplate or polished stainless steel. The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the corners "TIG" welded. Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops. Front facing compartment walls will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to Page 54 of 96 prevent injury UNDERBODY SUPPORT SYSTEM Due to the severe loading requirements of this pumper a method of body and compartment support suitable for the intended load will be provided. The backbone of the support system will be the chassis frame rails which is the strongest component of the chassis and is designed for sustaining maximum loads. The support system will include .375" thick steel vertical angle supports bolted to the chassis frame rails with .625" diameter bolts. Attached to the bottom of the steel vertical angles will be horizontal angles, with gussets welded to the vertical members, which extend to the outside edge of the body. A steel frame will be mounted on the top of these supports to create a "floating substructure" which will result in a 500 pound equipment support rating per lower compartment. The "floating substructure" will be separated from the horizontal members with neoprene elastomer isolators. These isolators will reduce the natural flex stress of the chassis from being transmitted to the body. Isolators will have a broad load range, proven viability in vehicular applications, be of a fail safe design and allow for all necessary movement in three (3) transitional and rotational modes. The neoprene isolators will be installed in a modified "V" three (3) -point mounting pattern to reduce the natural flex of the chassis being transmitted to the body. A design with body compartments hanging on the chassis in an unsupported fashion will not be acceptable. AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards. LOUVERS All body compartments will have a minimum of one (1) set of louvers stamped into a wall to provide the proper airflow inside the compartment and to prevent water from dripping into the compartment. These louvers will be formed into the metal and not added to the compartment as a separate plate. TESTING OF BODY DESIGN Body structural analysis has been fully tested. Proven engineering and test techniques such as finite element analysis, stress coating and strain gauging have been performed with special attention given to fatigue, life and structural integrity of the cab, body and substructure. Page 55 of 96 Body will be tested while loaded to its greatest in-service weight The criteria used during the testing procedure will include: - Raising opposite corners of the vehicle tires 9.00" to simulate the twisting a truck may experience when driving over a curb. - Making a 90 degree turn, while driving at 20 mph to simulate aggressive driving conditions. - Driving the vehicle at 35 mph on a "washboard" road. - Driving the vehicle at 55 mph on a smooth road. - Accelerating the vehicle fully, until reaching the approximate speed of 45 mph on rough pavement. Evidence of actual testing techniques will be made available upon request. BODY WARRANTY Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its second generation body and/or heavy duty rescue body are free of defects in design and workmanship in body tubular support, mounting structures and other structural components identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. COMPARTMENTATION. DRIVER'S SIDE A full height, roll -up door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 49.00" wide x 58.25" high x 25.88" deep in the lower 26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The height of the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 43.25" wide x 58.25" high. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and Page 56 of 96 will easily be accomplished with one hand A roll -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 25.38" high x 12.00" deep. The height of the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 58.25" wide x 25.12" high. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and will easily be accomplished with one hand. A full height, roll -up door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 31.50" wide x 58.25" high x 25.88" deep in the lower 26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The height of the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 28.75" wide x 58.25" high. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and will easily be accomplished with one hand. COMPARTMENTATION, PASSENGER' SIDE A full height, vertically hinged, single door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 27.50" wide x 67.63" high x 12.00" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower section. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 23.00" wide x 63.00" high. A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment. A horizontally hinged, single lift -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 32.88" high x 12.00" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 59.50" wide x 28.25" high. The lift -up door will be furnished with two (2) gas -charged cylinders to assist in the opening of the door and to maintain the door in an open position. There will be a field adjustable, three -position bracket mounted on the vertical side door opening that will allow the door to be held open at 87°, 90°, or 93°. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism. A vertically hinged, double door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 47.50" wide x 67.63" high x 12.00" deep. A Page 57 of 96 section of this compartment will be 25.88" deep x 26.00" height directly behind the rear wheels. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 46.00" wide x 63.00" high. A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment. ROLL -UP DOOR, SIDE COMPARTMENTS All roll -up door(s) will be of an anodized satin finish, double faced, aluminum construction and manufactured by A&A Manufacturing (Gortite). Lath sections will be an interlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without complete disassembly of door. Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal contact and prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to operate in extreme temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Side, top and bottom seals will be provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be made of Santoprene. All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be acceptable. A polished stainless steel lift bar will be provided for opening door. Lift bar will be located at the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors frame. A ledge will be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door. Door(s) will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat will be flat. The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose equipment from jamming the door from inside. To conserve space in the compartment(s), the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in diameter. A roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will not acceptable. The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00". A heavy-duty magnetic switch will be used for control of 'open compartment door" warning lights. All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered under this warranty will be to the original owner. Page 58 of 96 COMPARTMENTATION, REAR A vertically hinged, double door compartment above the rear tailboard will be provided. Interior dimensions of this compartment will be 40.00" wide x 40.63" high x 25.88" deep. Depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. A louvered, removable access panel will be furnished on the back wall of the compartment. Rear compartment will be open into the rear side compartments. Clear door opening of this compartment will be 34.50" wide x 36.00" high. Each of the vertically hinged compartment doors will be provided with a positive door holder. DOORS, REAR COMPARTMENT All hinged compartment doors will be lap style with double panel construction and fabricated of .09" 50521-134 aluminum. Doors will be a minimum of 1.50" thick with a full interior panel. To provide additional door strength, a "C" section reinforcement will be installed between the outer and interior panels. Doors will be provided with a closed cell rubber gasket around the surface that laps onto the body. A second heavy-duty automotive rubber molding with a hollow core will be installed on the door framing that seals onto the interior pan, to ensure a weather resisting compartment. All compartment doors will have polished stainless steel continuous hinge with a pin diameter of .1875", that is bolted or screwed on with stainless steel fasteners. A strip of dielectric isolation tape will be provided between the hinge and the doorjamb. All door lock mechanisms will be fully enclosed within the door panels to prevent fouling of the lock in the event equipment inside shifts into the lock area. Doors will be latched with recessed, polished stainless steel "D" ring handles and Eberhard 106 locks. To prevent corrosion caused by dissimilar metals, compartment door handles will not be attached to outer door panel with screws. A rubber gasket will be provided between the "D" ring handle and the door. PULL-OUT TRAY There will be three (3) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position. Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of dependable service. Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and 'but" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand. Page 59 of 96 Tray location will be two on the driver's side fore and aft of rear wheels and one in the right rear compartment. Heavy-duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body. Pac Trac equipment mounting system will be installed on the walls of one (1) compartment(s), driver's side over wheel compartment. PARTITION, TRANSVERSE REAR COMPARTMENT Two (2) partitions will be bolted in place to separate driver and passenger side rear compartments from the rear tailboard compartment. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES There will be seven (7) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf construction will consist of .125" pan -shaped aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track. The location will be two in D3, one in D2, one in D1, one P2,P1 and R1. MOUNTING TRACKS There will be six (6) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in all compartments. These tracks will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s). RUB RAIL Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub rail. Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity. The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement in the event of damage. BODY FENDER CROWNS Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings. A rubber welting will be installed between the body and the crown to seal the seam and restrict moisture from entering. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the fender sheet metal to prevent corrosion. HARD SUCTION HOSE Hard suction hose will not be required. Page 60 of 96 HANDRAILS The handrails will be 1.25" diameter anodized aluminum extrusion, with a ribbed design, to provide a positive gripping surface. Chrome plated end stanchions will support the handrail. Plastic gaskets will be used between end stanchions and any painted surfaces. Drain holes will be provided in the bottom of all vertically mounted handrails. - Four (4) handrails will be provided, two above each side pump panel. - One (1) vertical handrail will be provided on the driver's body, on the front bulkhead door frame. - One (1) vertical handrail, not less than 29.00" long, will be located on each rear beavertail. - One (1) full width horizontal handrail will be provided below the hose bed at the rear of the apparatus. AIR BOTTLE STORAGE (Single bottle) A total of four (4) air bottle compartments will be provided and located fore and aft each rear wheel. The air bottle compartment will be in the form of a round tube, 7.63" diameter, and will be of adequate depth to accommodate different size air bottles. The flooring will be rubber lined and have a drain hole. A stainless steel door with a chrome -plated latch will be provided to contain the air bottle. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the door hinge, hinge fasteners and the body sheet metal. EXTENSION LADDER There will be a 24', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo -Safety, Series 900-A extension ladder provided. ROOF LADDER There will be a 14' aluminum, Duo -Safety, Series 775-A roof ladder provided. LADDER STORAGE The ladders will be stored between the water tank and the passenger's side compartments. The ladders will extend into the pump compartment just to the rear of the water pump discharges. The ladder storage area will be enclosed as practical by means of sheet metal to protect the ladders from road dirt. The ladders that extend into the pump house will also be enclosed. A black rubber boot will be provided to enclosed the ladders in the gap between the pump house and the body. Each ladder will be stored vertically in a separate stainless steel storage trough. Each stainless steel trough will be lined with Dura -Surf nylon slides. Page 61 of 96 A bright aluminum treadplate enclosure will be provided at the rear of the body to properly contain the ladders This enclosure will extend to the rear of the side body compartments. The enclosure will also include a vertically hinged smooth aluminum door with a "D" handle latch to access the ladders. FOLDING LADDER One (1) 10' aluminum, Series 585-A Duo -Safety folding ladder will be installed in the pike pole/folding ladder compartment. PIKE POLE, 8' One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -10, 10' long Gator Back Hook, will be provided and located in the compartment. PIKE POLE, 8' One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -6, 6' long Gator Back Hook, will be provided and located in the pike pole compartment. PIKE POLE 8 FT, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) 8 ft or longer pike pole mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. The pike pole is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the pike pole. PIKE POLE, 6' One (1) pike pole 6' long with a Nupla Featherlight fiberglass handle will be provided and located in the compartment. PIKE POLES/FOLDING LADDER COMPARTMENT A compartment will be provided, recessed below the water tank tee at the rear of body, on the driver's side. The compartment will be equipped with two (2) pvc tubes for storage of two (2) straight handled pike poles and (1) stainless steel trough for storage of (1) folding ladder. A stainless steel door will be provided at the rear with a lift and turn latch. REAR STEPS Bright aluminum treadplate corner steps will be provided at the rear. All steps will provide adequate surface for stepping. Page 62 of 96 PUMP Pump will be a Waterous CM, 1250 gpm, two (2) stage midship mounted centrifugal type. Pump will be the class "A" type. Pump will deliver the percentage of rated discharge at pressures indicated below: - 100% of rated capacity at 150 psi net pump pressure. - 70% of rated capacity at 200 psi net pump pressure. - 50% of rated capacity at 250 psi net pump pressure. Pump body will be close -grained gray iron, bronze fitted, and will be horizontally split in two (2) sections for easy removal of the entire impeller shaft assembly (including wear rings). Pump will be designed for complete servicing from the bottom of the truck, without disturbing the pump setting or apparatus piping. Pump case halves will be bolted together on a single horizontal face to minimize a chance of leakage and facilitate ease of reassembly. No end flanges will be used. Discharge manifold of the pump will be cast as an integral part of the pump body assembly and will provide a minimum of three (3) 3.50" openings for flexibility in providing various discharge outlets for maximum efficiency. The three (3) 3.50" openings will be located as follows: one (1) outlet to the right of the pump, one (1) outlet to the left of the pump, and one (1) outlet directly on top of the discharge manifold. Impeller shaft will be stainless steel, accurately ground to size. It will be supported at each end by sealed, anti -friction ball bearings for rigid precise support. Bearings will be protected from water and sediment by suitable stuffing boxes, flinger rings, and oil seals. No special or sleeve type bearings will be used. Pump will be equipped with a self-adjusting, maintenance -free, mechanical shaft seal. The mechanical seal will consist of a flat, highly polished, spring fed carbon ring that rotates with the impeller shaft. The carbon ring will press against a highly polished stainless steel stationary ring that is sealed within the pump body. In addition, a throttling ring will be pressed into the steel chamber cover, providing a very small clearance around the rotating shaft in the event of a mechanical seal failure. The pump performance will not deteriorate, nor will the pump lose prime, while drafting if the seal fails during pump operation. Wear rings will be bronze and easily replaceable to restore original pump efficiency and eliminate the need to replace the entire pump casing due to wear. Page 63 of 96 PUMP TRANSMISSION The pump transmission will be made of a three (3) piece, aluminum, horizontally split casing. Power transfer to pump will be through a high strength Morse HY-VO silent drive chain. By the use of a chain rather than gears, 50% of the sprocket will be accepting or transmitting torque, compared to two (2) or three (3) teeth doing all the work. Drive shafts will be 2.35" diameter hardened and ground alloy steel and supported by ball bearings. The case will be designed to eliminate the need for water cooling. AIR PUMP SHIFT Pump shift engagement will be made by a two (2) position sliding collar, actuated pneumatically (by air pressure), with a three (3) position air control switch located in the cab. A manual back-up shift control will also be located on the driver's side pump panel. Two (2) indicator lights will be provided adjacent to the pump shift inside the cab. One (1) green light will indicate the pump shift has been completed and be labeled "pump engaged". The second green light will indicate when the pump has been engaged, and that the chassis transmission is in pump gear. This indicator light will be labeled "OK to pump". Another green indicator light will be installed adjacent to the hand throttle on the pump panel and indicate either the pump is engaged and the road transmission is in pump gear, or the road transmission is in neutral and the pump is not engaged. This indicator light will be labeled "Warning: Do not open throttle unless light is on". The pump shift control in the cab will be illuminated to meet NFPA requirements. TRANSMISSION LOCK-UP The direct gear transmission lock-up for the fire pump operation will engage automatically when the pump shift control, in the cab, is activated. AUXILIARY COOLING SYSTEM A supplementary heat exchange cooling system will be provided to allow the use of water from the discharge side of the pump for cooling the engine water. The heat exchanger will be cylindrical type and will be a separate unit. The heat exchanger will be installed in the pump or engine compartment with the control located on the pump operator's control panel. Exchanger will be plumbed to the master drain valve. TRANSFER VALVE Transfer valve design will be of the latest ball type, of all bronze construction and incorporate a hydraulically balanced seal assembly, minimizing leakage around the ball and assuring maximum pump efficiency. Transfer valve will operate smoothly and without sticking, even when exposed to sandy or dirty water. Transfer valve will be operated electrically with a control switch mounted on the pump operator's control panel, with two (2) indicator lights which will indicate "pressure" or Page 64 of 96 "volume". Transfer valve will have the ability to change from series (pressure) operation to parallel (volume) operation without reducing the operating speed of the engine regardless of the operating pressure of the pump, thus maintaining an effective fire stream at the nozzle at all times. A manual override will be provided in the event of electrical malfunction. The manual override system operates with the use of a removable hand crank located at the left (driver's) side pump panel. INTAKE RELIEF VALVE An Elkhart relief valve will be installed on the suction side of the pump preset at 125 psig. Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig. Outlet will terminate below the framerails with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter and will have a "do not cap" warning tag. Control will be located behind an access door at the right (passenger's) side pump panel. RELIEF VALVE A Waterous adjustable relief valve, specially designed for fire service, will be provided. Valve will be positive, quick acting, and include an instantaneous on/off control. When in the off position, the relief valve will functionally be removed from the system. When turned back to the on position, the relief valve will again monitor and maintain the previous pressure setting. Control for adjusting pressure will be elliptical shaped for positive grip. An easily removable pilot valve strainer will be provided and be accessible from the pump operator's panel. Two (2) indicator lights will be furnished, showing the position of the relief valve (amber for open and green for closed). PRIMER An electric pump priming system will be furnished with the apparatus. It will consist of a rotary vane priming pump, driven by a 12 volt electric motor. All rotating parts of the pump will be made of corrosion resistant aluminum, stainless steel, or laminated phenolic. Pump cylinder will be made of aluminum alloy, hard anodized and Teflon coated, for corrosion resistance and long life. Page 65 of 96 The primer will be built by the manufacturer of the fire pump. A control located at the pump control panel will operate the primer. When dry, the pump system will be capable of taking suction through 20 feet of hard suction hose and discharging water in not more than the time allowed by current NFPA 1901 standard. Also, rated capacity of the pump will be achieved at the lift stated in current NFPA 1901 standard table. THERMAL RELIEF VALVE A Waterous Overheat Protection Manager (OPM) will be mounted on the water pump. The OPM will consist of a valve that opens and discharges to the ground when the water in the pump reaches 140 F and a warning light that is triggered when the water in the pump reaches 180 F. The warning light will act as an additional protection device if the temperature in the pump keeps rising after the valve opens. The warning light with a test switch will be mounted on the pump operator panel. PUMP WARRANTY A Waterous five (5) year warranty will be provided for the pump. PUMP MANUALS Two (2) pump manuals from the pump manufacturer will be furnished in compact disc format with the apparatus. The manuals will cover pump operation, maintenance, and parts. PLUMBING All inlet and outlet plumbing, 3.00" and smaller, will be plumbed with either stainless steel pipe or synthetic rubber hose reinforced with high -tensile polyester braid. If hose is used, it must have a minimum burst rating of 1,000 psi and be equipped with high pressure couplings. Larger inlets and outlets will be threaded or welded black iron pipe. Small diameter secondary plumbing such as drain lines will be stainless steel, brass or hose. Where vibration or chassis flexing may damage or loosen piping or where a coupling is required for servicing, the piping will be equipped with victaulic or rubber couplings. All lines to drain through either a master drain valve or will be equipped with individual drain valves. All individual drain lines for discharges will be extended with a hose to drain below the chassis frame. All water carrying gauge lines will be of flexible polypropylene tubing. PUMP PLUMBING WARRANTY Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within sixty (60) days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur of the expiration of ten years or 100,000 miles of vehicle use after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that the stainless steel piping that is 3.00" and smaller in diameter in its first Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will be Page 66 of 96 free of structural failures caused by defective design, workmanship, or perforation caused by corrosion. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within thirty (30) days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. Pierce's obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing without charge, as Pierce may elect, the stainless steel piping or components which Pierce determines to have failed due to defective design, workmanship, or perforation caused by corrosion. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. MAIN PUMP INLETS A 6.00" pump manifold inlet will be provided on the passenger's side of the vehicle only. The suction inlet will include a removable die cast zinc screen that is designed to provide cathodic protection for the pump, thus reducing corrosion in the pump. The main pump inlets will have National Standard Threads with a long handle chrome cap. The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected. VALVES All ball valves will be Akron Brass. The Akron valves will be the 8000 series heavy-duty style with a stainless steel ball and a simple two -seat design. No lubrication or regular maintenance is required on the valve. Valves will have a ten (10) year warranty. INLET (Left side) On the left side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50" National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer, chrome swivel and plug. INLET (Right side) On the right side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50" National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer, chrome swivel and plug. Inlet valve location will be outside the pump panel. ANODE, INLET A pair of sacrificial zinc anodes will be provided in the water pump inlets to protect the pump Page 67 of 96 from corrosion. INLET CONTROL Control for the side auxiliary inlet(s) will be located at the inlet valve. INLET (Front) A 4.00" Inlet front inlet with die cast zinc screens will be provided using 5.00" welded black iron pipe and a 5.00" butterfly valve. Only radiused elbows will be used in the piping, no mitered joints. Drains are furnished in all the low points of piping and have 3/4" ball valve with a handwheel control. A bleeder valve will be located at the threaded connection. The front suction will be located on the passenger side of the bumper extension CONTROL, FRONT INLET The front suction will be gated with an electric operated control located at the pump operators panel. The controller will be an Akron Navigator Model 9313, which will allow the valve to be gated for ease of operation. The controller will have individual red, yellow and green lights to show the valve position. A manual override will be provided on the valve and located behind a stainless steel access door, located on the passenger side pump panel. A manual override switch will be provided next to the stainless steel access door. The switch will cut off power to the valve, making turning the manual override on the valve much easier. Manual override will be in an easily accessible location. INTAKE RELIEF VALVE An intake relief valve, preset at 125 psig, will be installed on the inlet side of the valve. Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig. Outlet will terminate below the framerails. The front inlet will have National Standard hose threads with a long handle chrome plated cap. The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exlusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected. The front suction will have a 4.00" swivel with National Standard hose threads and a long Page 68 of 96 handle chromed plated cap. The swivel will have a smooth surface chrome finish INLET BLEEDER VALVE A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each side gated inlet. The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails. TANK TO PUMP The booster tank will be connected to the intake side of the pump with heavy duty piping and a quarter turn 3.00" full flow line valve with the control remotely located at the operator's panel. Tank to pump line will run straight (no elbows) from the pump into the front face of the water tank and angle down into the tank sump. A rubber coupling will be included in this line to prevent damage from vibration or chassis flexing. A check valve will be provided in the tank to pump supply line to prevent the possibility of "back filling" the water tank. TANK REFILL A 1.50" combination tank refill and pump re -circulation line will be provided, using a quarter - turn full flow ball valve controlled from the pump operator's panel. DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Left Side) There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the left side of the apparatus, terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter. DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Right Side) There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the right side of the apparatus, terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter. DISCHARGE CAPS Chrome plated, rocker lug, caps with chains will be furnished for all side discharge outlets. The caps will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected. OUTLET BLEEDERS A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each outlet 1.50" or larger. Automatic drain valves are acceptable with some outlets if deemed appropriate with the application. The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the side pump panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for Page 69 of 96 operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. Bleeders will be located at the bottom of the pump panel. They will be properly labeled identifying the discharge they are plumbed in to. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails. ELBOWS, LEFT SIDE OUTLETS The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the left side pump panel, will be furnished with a 2.50"(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50"(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow. The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected. ELBOWS, RIGHT SIDE OUTLETS The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the right side pump panel, will be furnished with a 2.50"(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50"(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow. The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected. There will be two (2) adapters with 2.50" FNST x 1.50" MNST threads and a 1.50" chrome plated cap installed on one each side. DISCHARGE DRAIN VALVES Provide a manual style drain in all low plumbing points that would normally have automatic drains. DISCHARGE OUTLET CONTROLS The discharge outlets will incorporate a quarter -turn ball valve with the control located at the pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the valve. If a handwheel control valve is used, the control will be a minimum of a 3.9" diameter chrome plated handwheel with a dial position indicator built in to the center of the handwheel. DELUGE RISER A 3.00" deluge riser will be installed above the pump in such a manner that a monitor can be mounted and used effectively. Piping will be rigidly braced and installed securely so no movement develops when the line is charged. The riser will be gated and controlled at the pump operator's panel with a handwheel control. TELESCOPIC PIPING The deluge riser piping will include a 18.00" Task Force Model XG18 Extend -A -Gun extension. Page 70 of 96 This extension will be telescopic to allow the deluge gun to be raised 18.00" increasing the range of operation. A position sensor will be provided on the telescopic piping that will activate the "do not move vehicle" light inside the cab when the monitor is in the raised position. MONITOR An Akron Model 3423 monitor will be properly installed on the deluge riser. This monitor will include both a fixed mounting base and a portable base with two (2) clappered 2.5" inlets. The monitor will be unpainted. NOZZLE, DELUGE Akron model #2499 Quad Stacked pyrolite deluge tips will be provided. The tip sizes will be 1.375", 1.50", 1.75", and 2.00". This will include an Akron 3488 pyrolite stream shaper. The deluge riser will have male National Pipe Threads for mounting the monitor. CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 1.50" Two (2) crosslays with 1.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying 250' of 1.75" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.00" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.00" quarter turn ball valve. Outlets to be equipped with a 1.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus. The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel. The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color. Vertical scuffplates, constructed of stainless steel, will be provided at the front and rear ends of the bed on each side of vehicle. Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum. CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 2.50" One (1) crosslay with 2.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed will be capable of carrying 200' of 2.5" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.50" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.50" quarter turn ball valve. The outlets will be equipped with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of Page 71 of 96 apparatus. The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color. Stainless steel vertical scuffplates will be provided at hose bed ends (each side of vehicle). Bottom of hose bed ends (each side) will also be equipped with a stainless steel scuffplate. Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum. CROSSLAY COVER A hinged aluminum treadplate cover will be installed over the crosslay hose beds. It will include a latch at each end of the cover to hold it securely in place, a chrome grab handle at each end for opening and closing the cover and a foam rubber gasket where the cover comes into contact to a painted surface. CROSSLAY 8.00" LOWER THAN STANDARD The crosslays will be lowered 8.00" from standard. CROSSLAY COVER A black vinyl cover with Velcro fasteners along each side and bottom will be provided over the ends of the crosslay hose beds. A bar will be provided on the bottom to accommodate a Velcro loop to positively hold the base. FOAM CONCENTRATE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM A Hypro FoamPro®, Model 2001, foam system will be provided as the means for the proportioning of foam concentrate into the water stream. The FoamPro is an electronic, fully automatic, variable speed, direct injection, discharge side foam proportioning system. This system will be capable of handling Class "A" foam concentrates, as well as most Class "B" foam concentrates. The foam system will be plumbed to three (3) discharges. The discharges capable of dispensing foam will be three crosslays. The foam proportioning system operation will be based on a direct measurement of water flows, and remain consistent within the specified flow and pressure. The system will be equipped with a digital electronic control display on the pump panel. Incorporated within the control display will be a microprocessor, which receives input from the system flow meter while also monitoring the foam concentrate pump output. The microprocessor will compare the values of the water flow versus the foam flow, to ensure the proportion rate is accurate. One (1) paddle wheel will be installed to monitor all foam discharges Page 72 of 96 Push button control for the form proportioning rate will allow a ratio from 0.1% to 3.0% in 0.1% increments. The rated capacity of this system will be 85 gpm at 3.0% and 500 gpm at 0.5 %. A 2.5 gpm @150 psi, positive displacement foam pump will be powered by a 1/2 hp 12 vdc electric motor. One (1) check valve will be installed in the plumbing to prevent foam from contaminating the water pump. The check valve will be approved by the foam system manufacturer. FOAM TANK The foam tank will be an integral portion of the polypropylene water tank. The cell will have a capacity of 20 gallons of foam with the intended use of Class "A" foam. The brand of foam stored in this tank will be TBD. The foam cell will not reduce the capacity of the water tank. The foam cell will have a screen in the fill dome and a breather in the lid. FOAM TANK DRAIN The foam tank drain will be a 1.00" drain valve located inside the pump compartment accessible through a door on the passenger's side pump panel. PUMP COMPARTMENT The pump compartment will be separate from the hose body and compartments so that each may flex independently of the other. It will be a fabricated assembly of steel tubing, angles and channels which supports both the fire pump and the side running boards. The pump compartment will be mounted on the chassis frame rails with rubber biscuits in a four point pattern to allow for chassis frame twist. Pump compartment, pump, plumbing and gauge panels will be removable from the chassis in a single assembly. PUMP CONTROL PANELS (Side Control) All pump controls and gauges will be located at the left (driver's) side of the apparatus and properly marked. The pump panel on the right (passenger's) side is removable with lift and turn type fasteners. The left (driver's) side is fastened with screws. The control panels will be 45.00" wide. The gauge and control panels will be two (2) separate panels for ease of maintenance. Polished stainless steel trim collars will be installed around all inlets and outlets. All push/pull valve controls will have 1/4 turn locking control rods with polished chrome Page 73 of 96 plated zinc tee handles. Guides for the push/pull control rods will be chrome plated zinc castings securely mounted to the pump panel. Push/pull valve controls will be capable of locking in any position. The control rods will pull straight out of the panel and will be equipped with universal joints to eliminate binding. The identification tag for each valve control will be recessed in the face of the tee handle. All discharge outlets will have color coded identification tags, with each discharge having its own unique color. Color coding will include the labeling of the outlet and the drain for each corresponding discharge. All line pressure gauges will be mounted in individual chrome plated castings with the identification tag recessed in the casting below the gauge. All remaining identification tags will be mounted on the pump panel in chrome plated bezels. Mounting of the castings and identification bezels will be done with a threaded peg cast on the back side of the bezel or screws. PUMP PANEL CONFIGURATION The pump panel configuration will be neat and orderly. PUMP AND GAUGE PANEL The pump and gauge panels will be constructed of stainless steel with a brushed finish. A polished aluminum trim molding will be provided on both sides of the pump panel. PUMP PANEL GAUGES AND CONTROLS The following will be provided on the pump and gauge panels in a neat and orderly fashion: - Engine Oil Pressure Gauge: With visual and audible warning - Engine Water Temperature Gauge: With visual and audible warning - Tachometer: Electric - Master Pump Drain Control - Voltmeter - Engine Throttle - Check Transmission Warning Indicator Light - Stop Engine Warning Indicator Light - Check Engine Warning Indicator Light. - Pump Hourmeter - Fuel Gauge Page 74 of 96 AIR HORN SWITCH An air horn control switch will be provided at the pump operator's control panel. This switch will be red and properly labeled and put within easy reach of the operator in the electrical switch panel. RADIO SPEAKER A University model radio speaker will be provided and mounted at the pump panel. Wiring will not be necessary. GAUGES, VACUUM and PRESSURE The pump vacuum and pressure gauges will be silicone filled and manufactured by Class 1, Inc. The gauges will be a minimum of 4.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black lettering, with a pressure range of 30.00"-0-600#. The pump pressure and vacuum gauges will be installed adjacent to each other at the pump operator's control panel. Test port connections will be provided at the pump operator's panel. One will be connected to the intake side of the pump, and the other to the discharge manifold of the pump. They will have 0.25 in. standard pipe thread connections and polished stainless steel plugs. They will be marked with a label. PRESSURE GAUGES The individual "line" pressure gauges for the discharges will be interlube filled and manufactured by Class 1. The gauges will be a minimum of 3.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black lettering. Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum/pressure range of 30.00"-0-600#. The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the outlet control as practical. WATER LEVEL GAUGE An electric water level gauge will be provided on the operator's panel that registers water level by means of five (5) brightly colored incandescent lights. The water level indicators will be as follows: - Full = Green - 3/4 = Yellow - 1/2 = Yellow - 1/4 = Yellow - Refill = Red To further alert the pump operator, the refill light will start flashing when the water level drops Page 75 of 96 below the 1/4 mark The level measurement will be based on the sensing of the electrical conductivity of the water in the tank. The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide complete protection from water and environmental elements. The gauge light bulbs will be rated for 15,000 hours. The bulbs will be easily replaced by unscrewing the colored lens cover. The cover plate panel bezel will be of a chrome plated die cast design. The overlay graphics will be on the inside surface of the composite overlay to provide protection from wear. The composite overlay will be scratch resistant and immune to cleaning solvents and UV light weathering. The water level probe will be constructed of chemical resistant, PVC plastic with a 3.00" diameter anodized flange. The internal wire connectors and electronics will be fully encapsulated to protect against water, dirt, and vibration. The probe system will not contain moving parts or mechanical switching. WATER LEVEL GAUGE, ADDITIONAL An Ernst sight tube water level indicator will be mounted on the driver side pump panel. FOAM LEVEL GAUGE An electronic foam level gauge will be provided on the operator's panel that registers foam level by means of five colored LED lights. The lights will be durable, ultra -bright five LED design viewable through 180 degrees. The foam level indicators will be as follows: - 100% = Green - 75% = Yellow - 50% = Yellow - 25% = Yellow - Refill = Red The light will flash when the level drops below the given level indicator to provide an eighth of a tank indication. To further alert the pump operator, the lights will flash sequentially when the foam tank is empty. The level measurement will be based on the sensing of head pressure of the fluid in the tank. The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material with a chrome plated die cast bezel to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide complete protection from foam and environmental elements. An industrial pressure transducer will be mounted to the outside of the tank. The Page 76 of 96 display will be able to be calibrated in the field and will measure head pressure to accurately show the tank level. LIGHT SHIELD Illumination will be provided by On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED lights for controls, switches, essential instructions, gauges, and instruments necessary for the operation of the apparatus and the equipment provided on it. External illumination will be a minimum of five (5) foot-candles on the face of the device. Internal illumination will be a minimum of four (4) footlamberts. Lights will be installed under a stainless steel shield. A light will come on above the pump panel light switch when the parking brake is set. This is to afford the operator some illumination when first approaching the control panel. A pump engaged indicator will come on at the operator's panel when the pump is shifted into gear from inside the cab. The remaining lights to be actuated from a switch located on the pump panel. ADDITIONAL LIGHT SHIELD An additional On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED light shield will be provided above passenger's side pump panel. The pump panel will be illuminated by Night Stick, LED lights installed under the light shield. The lights will be operated from a switch on the pump panel. ELECTRICAL HARNESSING INSTALLATION All 12 -volt wiring and harnessing installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to specification PM -QA W-101: Pierce manufacturing Wiring Harness Specification. To ensure rugged dependability, all wiring harnesses installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to the following specifications: SAE J1128 - Low tension primary cable SAE J1292 - Automobile, truck, truck -tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring SAE J163 - Low tension wiring and cable terminals and splice clips SAE J2202 - Heavy duty wiring systems for on -highway trucks NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus FMVSS 302 - Flammability of interior materials for passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses SAE J1939 - Serial communications protocol SAE J2030 - Heavy-duty electrical connector performance standard SAE J2223 - Connections for on board vehicle electrical wiring harnesses NEC - National Electrical Code SAE J561 - Electrical terminals - Eyelet and spade type SAE J928 - Electrical terminals - Pin and receptacle type A Wiring will be run in loom or conduit where exposed, and have grommets or other edge protection where wires pass through metal. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Wire colors will be integral to each wire insulator and run the entire length of each wire. Page 77 of 96 Harnessing containing multiple wires and uses a single wire color for all wires will not be allowed. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. All wiring installed between the cab and into doors will be protected by an expandable rubber boot to protect the wiring. Exterior exposed wire connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids. Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines: (1) All wire ends not placed into connectors will be sealed with a heat shrink end cap. Wires without a terminating connector or sealed end cap will not be allowed. (2) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon (no exception). Large fender washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof. (3) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body. (4) For low cost of ownership, electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will be quickly accessible. For ease of use, a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from the mounting area for inspection and service work. (5) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to non -waterproof electrical connectors located outside of the cab or body. All non -waterproof connections will require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation of the plug. (6) Any lights containing non -waterproof sockets in a weather -exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area. (7) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have DOW 1890 protective Coating applied completely over the metal portion of the terminal. (8) Rubber coated metal clamps will be used to support wire harnessing and battery cables routed along the chassis frame rails. (9) Heat shields will be used to protect harnessing in areas where high temperatures exist. Harnessing passing near the engine exhaust will be protected by a heat shield. (10)All braided wire harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy identification of the harness part number and fabrication date. (11) All standard wiring entering or exiting the cab will be routed through sealed bulkhead connectors to protect against water intrusion into the cab. BATTERY CABLE INSTALLATION All 12 -volt battery cables and battery cable harnessing installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to the following requirements: SAE J1127 - Battery Cable SAE J561 - Electrical terminals, eyelets and spade type SAE J562 - Nonmetallic loom SAE J836A - Automotive metallurgical joining SAE J1292 - Automotive truck, truck -tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus Page 78 of 96 Battery cables and battery cable harnessing will be installed utilizing the following guidelines: (1) All battery cables and battery harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy identification of the harness part number and fabrication date. (2) Splices will not be allowed on battery cables or battery cable harnesses. (3) For ease of identification and simplified use, battery cables will be color coded. All positive battery cables will be red in color or wrapped in red loom the entire length of the cable. All negative battery cables will be black in color. (4) For ease of identification, all positive battery cable isolated studs throughout the cab and chassis will be red in color. (5) For increased reliability and reduced maintenance, all electrical buss bars located on the exterior of the apparatus will be coated to prevent corrosion. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSTALLATION All lighting used on the apparatus will be, at a minimum, a two (2) wire light grounded through a wired connection to the battery system. Lights using an apparatus metal structure for grounding will not be allowed. An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order. The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery. STEP LIGHTS Four (4) Ri-Tar, Model M27HW2 Super LED, step lights will be provided. One (1) step light will be provided on each side, on the front compartment face and two (2) step lights at the rear to illuminate the tailboard. These step lights will be actuated with the pump panel light switch. All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901. REAR FMVSS LIGHTING The rear stop/tail and directional lighting will consist of the following: Two (2) Whelen model 60ROOBRR red LED stop/tail lights. Two (2) Whelen, Model 60AOOTAR, amber LED populated arrow turn light. These lights will be installed at the rear of the truck in a polished housing. Four (4) red reflectors will be provided. A Weldon, Model 23882-2600-00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side above the warning lights. A Weldon, Model 9186-23882-30, step lamp will illuminate the license plate. Two (2) Whelen, Model: 6000OVCR, LED backup lights will be provided. Page 79 of 96 REAR ID/MARKER DOT LIGHTING The three (3) identification lights located at the rear will be installed per the following: As close as practical to the vertical Centerline. Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches apart. Red in color. All at the same height. One (1) Truck Lite model 1505OR LED ID bar The outside clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following: To indicate the overall width of the vehicle. At least one (1) each side of the vertical Centerline. All at the same height. As near the top as practical. To be visible from the rear and the side. Four (4) Ri-Tar red Model M27 LED lights Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements. LIGHTING BEZEL Two (2) Whelen, model CAST4V, four (4) light aluminum housings will be provided for the rear stop/tail, directional, scene lights and warning. CORNERING/SCENE LIGHTS There will be one (1) pair of Whelen 600 halogen lights with flanges and 15 degree forward lens provided on the apparatus. The lights will be provided one each side of bumper extension. The halogen lights will be wired so they activate and cancel with the directional lights, and include a delay, cancel with the 4 -way flashers and activate by a switch in the cab. These lights will also activate with the other side scene light on the apparatus. MAP LIGHT One (1) map light with goose neck with a switch control on base of light will be installed passenger's side adjacent to the "A" post. The light will be a Sunnex, Model 742 with a 20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount. LIGHT, INTERMEDIATE There will be one (1) pair, of Truck -Lite, Model: 60115Y, amber, LED, turn signal, marker lights furnished, one (1) each side, horizontally in the rear fender panel. A stainless steel trim will be included with this installation. "DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR A flashing red indicator light, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated Page 80 of 96 automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light Is On". The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate a steady tone alarm when the parking brake is released. DO NOT MOVE TRUCK MESSAGES Messages will be displayed on the gauge panel LCD located forward of the steering wheel directly in front of the driver whenever the Do Not Move Truck light is active. The messages will designate the item or items not in the stowed for vehicle travel position (parking brake disengaged). The following messages will be displayed (where applicable) Do Not Move Truck DS Cab Door Open (Driver Side Cab Door Open) PS Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Cab Door Open) DS Crew Cab Door Open (Driver Side Crew Cab Door Open) PS Crew Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door Open) DS Body Door Open (Driver Side Body Door Open) PS Body Door Open (Passenger's Side Body Door Open) Rear Body Door Open. DS Ladder Rack Down (Driver Side Ladder Rack Down) PS Ladder Rack Down (Passenger Side Ladder Rack Down) Deck Gun Not Stowed Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to cause major damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved will be displayed as a caution message after the parking brake is disengaged. COMPARTMENT LIGHTING There will be seven (7) compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light strips. The strips will be centered vertically along each side of the door framing. The compartments with these strip lights will be located all compartments. Opening the compartment door will automatically turn the compartment lighting on. Page 81 of 96 PUMP COMPARTMENT LIGHT A pump compartment light will be provided inside the right side pump enclosure and accessible through a door on the pump panel. A. 125" weep hole will be provided in each light lens, preventing moisture retention. PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS CAB There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for each cab door. Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the driver, officer, and crew cab riding area exits, which will be activated automatically when the exit doors are opened and by the same means as the body perimeter lights. The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot- candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS BODY There will be a total of four (4) Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount, weatherproof lights provided on the apparatus. Two (2) lights will be provided under the rear step area and two (2) lights will be provided under the pump panel running boards. The lights will be spaced one (1) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be activated by a parking brake. The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot- candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for personnel to climb onto the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. SIDE SCENE LIGHTS one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 810CAOZR, 8-32 degree surface mount halogen scene lights with chrome trim ring will be provided one each side high between the front and rear doors. The lights will be controlled by: From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel and a contol at the officer side switch panel From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option 12 VOLT LIGHTING two (2) lights, Havis-Shields, Magnafire 3000 Model: 31, 70 watt, 12VDC, floodlights with switch, will be installed, two on the right side of the pump compartment. A pull up pole, side mount will be installed for each light head. These lights will be load managed when the parking brake is set. These lights will not be connected to the Do Not Move Truck indicator Page 82 of 96 12 VOLT LIGHTING There will be two (2) lights, Kwik -Raze model 631, 70W, non telescoping, 12V Magnafire light will be provided mounted on the left high side compartments4. These lights will be controlled from the following: From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel. From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option. From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option. These lights may be load managed when the parking brake is set. DECK LIGHTS Two (2) 6.00" Unity AG deck lights with swivel mount will be provided at the rear of the hose bed, one (1) each side. One (1) light will be furnished with a 160,000 candle power halogen spot bulb and the other will be furnished with a 6,000 candle power halogen flood bulb. CAB SPOTLIGHTS Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The spotlights will be furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs. HAND HELD LIGHT There will be four (4) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location will be in the cab. AIR HORN SYSTEM Two (2) Grover air horns will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed one each side. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing. A pressure protection valve will be installed in-line to prevent loss of air, in the air brake system. AIR HORN CONTROL The air horn will be actuated by a chrome push button switch located on the officer side of the engine tunnel and by a foot switch on the driver's side. Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is accessible to both the driver and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a minimum of 180 degrees. SPEAKER There will be one (1) speaker provided. Each speaker will be a Whelen, Model SA314A, 100 -watt, cast aluminum with natural finish. Each speaker will be pre -wired to the instrument panel. The speaker(s) will be recessed in the front bumper on the driver's side Page 83 of 96 MECHANICAL SIREN, (Auxiliary) A Federal Q213 siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel. The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper on the right side. The siren will be properly supported using the bumper framework. SWITCHES, MECHANICAL SIREN The mechanical siren will be actuated by one (1) foot switch located on the driver's side and a push button switch on the officer's side of cab. WARNING LIGHTS A 72.00" Whelen Freedom model FN**QLED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof. The lightbar will include the following: Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules. Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules. Two (2) red flashing front corner LED modules. One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module. One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module. One (1) GTT model 795 LED OpticomTM with National standard. All the lenses will be clear. Two (2) switches located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar. One (1) switch for the warning lights. One (1) switch for the traffic light controller. The clear warning lights and the traffic light controller will be turned off when the parking brake is set. WARNING LIGHTS (CAB ROOF SIDES) Two (2) 24" Whelen, Model: Freedom Mini LED lightbars will be mounted on the roof, one (1) on each side, over the crew cab doors. Each lightbar will include the following: Two (2) red flashing corner LED modules. Two (2) red flashing LED light. These lightbars will be controlled by the roof light switch Each lightbar will be furnished with a clear lens. HEADLIGHT FLASHER The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control switch located on the cab instrument panel. Page 84 of 96 The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the parking brake is set. SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING Six (6) Whelen model 60*02F*R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following positions: Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab corner - red Super LED/red lens each side. Two (2) lights, behind the crew cab doors - red Super LED/rd lens each side. Two (2) lights, N/A - red Super LED/red lens each side. The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel. These lights will be installed N/A. SIDE WARNING LIGHTS one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 500FPLF*R, LED lights will be provided. The lights will be located above the front wheels. The color of the lights will be red. These lights will be provided in addition to the NFPA minimum. These lights will be activated with the Side Zone Lower lights. REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING Two (2) Whelen model 60*02F*R, LED, red Super LED/red lens lights will be located at the rear of the apparatus required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical power requirements of NFPA. Each light will be mounted in a housing. WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Truck) Two (2) Whelen, Model: RB6T*P, warning lights will be provided at the rear of the truck, located one (1) on each side. One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights. The color of the lights will be driver side dome amber and passenger side dome red. The rear warning lights will be mounted on stainless steel brackets with all wiring totally enclosed. These brackets will also support the clearance/marker lights. TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL85 46.81" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep, amber LED traffic directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus. The Whelen model TACTLD1 control head will be included with this installation. The auxillary warning mode will be activated with the control head only. Page 85 of 96 This traffic directing light will be surface mounted over the rear door, at the rear of the apparatus as high as practical. The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel bracket centered between the driver and passenger. This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger. 110 VOLT INTERIOR RECEPTACLE Receptacle will be a NEMA 5-15, 120 volt, 15 amp, three (3) wire duplex household type connected to the shoreline. There will be one (1) receptacle provided. in the EMS cab compartment. KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE one (1) shoreline receptacle will be provided to operate the dedicated 120 -volt circuits on the truck without the use of the generator. The shoreline receptacle (s) will be provided with a NEMA 5-20, 120 volt, 20 amp, straight blade Kussmaul Super auto eject plug with a yellow weatherproof cover. The cover is spring loaded to close, preventing water from entering when the shoreline is not connected. The unit is completely sealed to prevent road dirt contamination. A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This instantaneously drives the plug from the receptacle. An internal switch arrangement will be provided to disconnect the load prior to ejection to eliminate arcing of the connector contacts. The shoreline will be connected to battery charger. A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment. The shoreline receptacle will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab. TRAINING There will be two (2) days of training provided at the Fire Department for operation, use and maintenance of the apparatus. There will be one (1) day of training provided for service technicians at the Fire Department for maintenance, trouble shooting and repair of the apparatus. - 36" Hooligan tool Page 86 of 96 - 51" Council Crowbar - Firehooks 24" bolt cutters BC -24 - 48" Nupla Scoop Shovel steel - 48" Nupla Round Point shovel - One Council 81b. Fiberglas sledge hammer - One 20'x 4" Snap Tite TPX 400 PSI yellow soft suction hose - Two Red Head 146-2 spanner and hydrant wrench sets. Pike poles, ladders, handlights, and wheels chocs will be mounted by Pierce LOOSE EQUIPMENT The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit: - One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the construction of the unit. NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.2 and 5.8.3 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21. - 800 ft (60 m) of 2'/" (65 mm) or larger fire hose. - 400 ft (120 m) of 1'/2' (38 mm), 13/" (45 mm), or 2" (52 mm) fire hose. - One (1) handline nozzle, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum. - Two (2) handline nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum. - One (1) playpipe with shutoff and 1" (25 mm), 1 1/8" (29 mm), and 1%4' (32 mm) tips. - One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open -Circuit Self -Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer. - One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s). - One (1) first aid kit. - Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in bracket(s) fastened to the apparatus. - Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. Page 87 of 96 - Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components (if equipped with an aerial device). - One (1) double female 2'/2' (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. - One (1) double male 2'/2" (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. - One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. - Two (2) salvage covers each a minimum size of 12 ft X 14 ft (3.7 m X 4.3 m). - One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSI/ISEA 207, Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five -point breakaway feature that includes two at the shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front. - Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28" (711 mm) in height, each equipped with a 6" (152 mm) retro -reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an additional 4" (102 mm) retro -reflective white band 2" (51 mm) below the 6" (152 mm) band. - Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminating capabilities. - One automatic external defibrillator (AED). - If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3 in. (75 mm) will include a pressure relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6. - If the apparatus does not have a 2'/" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from 21/2" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake. - If the supply hose carried has other than 21/2" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be carried to allow feeding the supply hose from a 21/2" NH thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2'/" NH female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or intake. Page 88 of 96 SOFT SUCTION HOSE, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.7.2 requires a minimum of 20 ft of suction hose or 15 ft of supply hose. Hose is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide suction or supply hose. - One (1) extinguisher, 10 pound, CO2 DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER There will be One (1) extinguisher, 20 pound, dry chemical extinguisher(s) provided. WATER EXTINGUISHER There will be One (1) extinguisher, 2.50 gallon pressurized water extinguisher(s). AXE, FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axe. - Two (2) pickhead axes: Fiberglass handles and pick covers PAINT The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as follows: 1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted include all chrome plated, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplate. Each imperfection on the exterior metal surface will be removed or filled and then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed before painting. 2. Chemical Cleaning and Treatment - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a high pressure and high temperature cleaning system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces at the conclusion of the metal treatment process. 3. Primer/Surfacer Coats - A two (2) component urethane primer/surfacer will be hand applied to the chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective base coat and to smooth out the surface. 4. Hand Sanding - The primer/surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish Page 89 of 96 5. Sealer Primer Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will be applied over the sanded primer. 6. Topcoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching. 7. Clearcoat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be applied. Lap style doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be clear coated and the standard roll -up door warranty will apply. All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be removed and painted separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly. The cab will be two-tone, with the upper section painted white along with a shield design on the cab face and lower section of the cab and body painted red. PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT Contractor will meet or exceed all current State (his) regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions: - Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free. - Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will be treated on-site to remove any other heavy metals. - Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency factor. - Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water wash process. If the dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating of 98.00%. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient. - Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed mechanically on a continual basis to keep the water clean. - Paint wastes are disposed of in an environmentally safe manner. They are used as fuel in kilns used in the cement manufacturing process - thereby extracting energy from a waste material. - Empty metal paint containers will be cleaned, crushed and recycled to recover the metal. - Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on-site, or sent off-site for distillation and returned for reuse. Residue from the distillation operation will be used as fuel in off-site cement kilns. Page 90 of 96 Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone depleting substances. Contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that his manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations. PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY The chassis frame assembly will be painted black before the installation of the cab and body, and before installation of the engine and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc. Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly will be painted black are frame rails, cross members, axles, suspension, steering gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting brackets, etc. WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its cab and body are free of blistering, peeling, corrosion, or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint material selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any: Topcoat Durability & Integrity of Coating System: Corrosion: Appearance: Adhesion, Blistering/Bubbling Dissimilar Metal and Gloss, Color Retention & Crevice Cracking 0-72 months 100% 0-36 months 100% 0-36 months 100% 73-96 months 50% 37-84 months 50% 37-48 months 50% 97-120 months 25% 85-120 months 25% 49-72 months 25% 73-120 months 10% This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's undercarriage, cab and body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year Limited Warranty. In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Limited Warranty, except cost allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a period of ten (10) years against corrosion perforation. Page 91 of 96 A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. PAINT, COMPARTMENT INTERIOR The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks. REFLECTIVE BAND A 6.00" white reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body. The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level. CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR There will be alternating chevron striping located on the rear -facing vertical surface of the apparatus. The entire rear surface, excluding the rear compartment door, will be covered. The colors will be red and yellow diamond grade. Each stripe will be 6.00" in width. This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be covered with chevron striping. REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS A 6.00" x 16.00" white reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel. This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement. LETTERING The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl. GOLDSTAR® LAMINATION WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that each Goldstar® lamination sold by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such Goldstar® lamination is affixed or installed is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This Page 92 of 96 limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. LETTERING Forty-one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, outlining and shading will be provided. LETTERING A quantity of ten (10) letters, 9.00" high N/A reflective will be installed on on the cab roof. UNDERCOATING, CAB & BODY The underside of the apparatus will be undercoated with an asphalt petroleum based material, dark in color. The undercoating material utilized on the apparatus will be formulated to resist corrosion and deaden unwanted sound or road noise. Coating texture will appear firm, flexible, and resistant to abrasion. Minimum dry film thickness will be in the range of 8.00 to 12.00 mils. The material will be applied to the following areas: Body and cab wheel well fender liners, on the back side only. Underside of body and cab sheet metal, and structural components. Underside and vertical sides of all sheet metal compartmentation, including support angles. Structural support members under running boards, rear platforms, battery boxes, walkways, etc. Inside surfaces of the pump heat enclosure, (when installed). Steel components used in construction of commercial or custom chassis cabs. Page 93 of 96 EXHIBIT B-2 Newport Beach 100' HD TDA 8/31/09 We are pleased to submit a proposal to you for a Pierce® Tractor -Drawn Aerial Ladder per your request for quotation. The following paragraphs will describe in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not specifically requested will not be provided. PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building bodies with one philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over 50 years of experience in the fire apparatus market. Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over 757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A $7 million dollar inventory of parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory. QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning. We currently have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure that the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards that we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce. Another part of this program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Welding Society Inspector to monitor our weld quality. DELIVERY The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper Breakin of all components while the apparatus is still under warranty. INFORMATION At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle. SAFETY VIDEO At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39 -minute, professionally -produced apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance. PERFORMANCE TESTS A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten (10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle and not less than 50% nor more than 75% on the rear axle. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Certification of insurance coverage will be enclosed. ISO COMPLIANCE Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001. These standards sponsored by the "International Organization for Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the Page 1 of 92 certificate of compliance Number 32454 is included with this proposal SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our headquarters, all chassis, cab, body and aerial systems are engineered, tested and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. Pierce© vehicles are also backed by a network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the fire service who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service and training. Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability, maintainability, performance and a high level of quality. NFPA 2009 STANDARDS This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions. Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be supplied with delivery of the apparatus. A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating. The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff involved with certifications. An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results. NFPA COMPLIANCY Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non-NFPA". INSPECTION CERTIFICATE A third party inspection certificate for the aerial device will be furnished upon delivery of the aerial device. The certificate will be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Type 1 and will indicate that the aerial device has been inspected on the production line and after final assembly. The following tests will be conducted: - Magnetic particle inspection will be conducted on every structural weld to assure the integrity of the weldments and to detect any flaws or weaknesses. Magnets will be placed on each side of the weld while iron powder is placed on the weld itself. The powder will detect any crack that may exist. This test will conform to ASTM E709 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial device. - With aluminum structural components, visual inspection will be performed on aluminum surfaces (non-magnetic). A liquid penetrant test will be performed on any suspected defective area. This test will conform to ASTM E165 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial device. - Ultrasonic inspection will be used to detect any flaws in pins, bolts and other critical mounting components. Page 2 of 92 Functional tests, load tests, stability tests, and visual structural examinations will be performed. These tests will determine any unusual deflection, noise, vibration, or instability characteristics of the unit. TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION The apparatus will be third -party, independent, audit -certified through Underwriters Laboratory (UL) to the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards. The certification includes: all design, production, operational and performance testing of the apparatus. GENERATOR TEST If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified by Underwriters Laboratories at the manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the time of delivery. BREATHING AIR TEST If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air system and certify that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection. DELIVERY Said apparatus and equipment will be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications hereto. Delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within about Delivered from Pierce Manufacturing to South Coast Fire Equipment, Ontario, Ca working days after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton, Wisconsin, and to be delivered to you at South Coast Fire Equipment Ontario, Ca. The specifications herein contained will form a part of the final contract and are subject to changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance by the company of the order to purchase, and provided such alterations do not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus. The proposal for fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) rules and regulations in effect at the time of bid and with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of bid, except as modified by customer specifications. Any increased costs incurred by first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above. Unless accepted within 30 days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition. INSPECTION TRIPS) The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for 3 Trips for 3 people each tripPre con, Mid and Final customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the bidder. PRODUCT CHANGES AND IMPROVEMENTS Our components and processes, as described in this proposal document, are as accurate as known at the time of bid submission, but are subject to change for the purpose of product or process improvements, or changes in industry standards providing the change does not affect the meaning or definition of the bid specifications. APPROVAL DRAWING A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate Page 3 of 92 the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc. A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing. DIAGRAM, ELECTRICAL DC CIRCUITS Three (3) sets of diagrams of the body and chassis DC electrical system will be provided with the completed apparatus. WARRANTY We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, as the company may elect, any parts thereof which are returned to us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to which examination is disclose to the company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such part, or parts will be returned to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or parts will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the original purchaser. This warranty will not apply: 1) To normal maintenance and adjustments. 2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way so that, in our judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse, neglect, or accident, nor to any vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory rated load capacity. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others representations to the original purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including liability for incidental or consequential damages on the part of the company. We neither assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty or liability on the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company. WARRANTY 1 YEAR CUSTOM CHASSIS Each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus will be warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. Each manufacturer will supply, as a part of their bid package, a copy of the warranty or warranties that they propose to provide, and in no case will it be less than one (1) year on the entire apparatus. All other warranties, as outlined in these specifications will be provided in writing as a part of the bid package. Failure to provide the warranties as outlined throughout these specifications will be cause for rejection of the bid package. CROSSMEMBERS WARRANTY A one (1) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers. BID BOND A bid bond will not be included. of rP�„P�+P rhP f_ »�•••.� . ,;ii . �..• A bond as security for the bid in the form o ' bond to accompa • 'd. Thi id bond will be issued by a Surety is listed on the U.S. Treasury tUe_nts list of acceptable sureties as d in Department Circular 570. 11 be issued by an authorized Page 4 of 92 representative of the Surety C pany and will be acco anied by a certif1 wer of attorne dated or for the d of bid. Th id bon ill include la uag which assures t e bidder/princip ill give a bo or bonds may specified in t biddin r contrac ocuments, ith g d and sufficie ety for the faith performa f the contract, incl i e Basic One Year imited anty, an or the rompt payme of labo material furnished ' e prosecution of th c tract. Notwithst 'ng any do ment or ertion to th contrary, y sure bond relate o e sale of a v cle ill apply y to Basic On 1) ear Limited Warr ty such vehic Any s ety bon relate the sale f a v cle will no ply to a ther warranties that included within t 's (OEM or o e ise) or to the wa anties (if any) any Mrd p of any part, c po t, attachment cessory that ' orporated into or attached to the vehi In the e t of any c tradiction r inconsis nc b ween t y provi 'nand any other document or ert n, this provi ' n . 1 prevail. PERFORMANCE BOND ,�rQ 11 ( �� Pierce Manufacturingwill provide, « �' *' «nl y � a p , of contract, of the Goatr-ge*l a performance bond, which guarantees performance of all terms and conditions of the contract and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the performance of the contract according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by the U.S. Treasury Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of the bid date. The performance bond will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent to, the date of the contract. Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will apply only to the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle. Any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that are included within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the warranties (if any) of any third party of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into or attached to the vehicle. In the event of any contradiction or inconsistency between this provision and any other document or assertion, this provision will prevail. ARROW-XTrm TRACTOR CHASSIS The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy-duty service, with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy-duty line tilt cab. SEATING CAPACITY The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4). WHEELBASE The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 149". GVW RATING The gross vehicle weight rating will be 72,600. FRAME The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 inch -pounds over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 inch -pounds over Page 5 of 92 the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat-treated .38" thick steel, with 3.50" wide flanges. FRAME RAIL WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of 50 years, which is the estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its chassis frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. FRAME REINFORCEMENT In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat-treated steel measuring 12.00" x 3.00" x .25". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu. in., yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of 857,462 inch -pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976,502 pounds per rail. The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge of the mainframe rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember. FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE The Oshkosh TAK-40 front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800 pounds. Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of 100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile iron. The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel. Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations. There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering gear extension. The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load. Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life. The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life. Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided. Page 6 of 92 The wheel ends will have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle wheelbase. The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle. WARRANTY, FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE The Oshkosh TAK-4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This warranty applies to the TAK-4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps etc., are covered under our standard chassis warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering for warranty). OIL SEALS Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle. SHOCK ABSORBERS Heavy-duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension. REAR AXLE The rear axle will be a MeritorTM, Model RS -30-185, with a capacity of 31,000 pounds. REAR AXLE WARRANTY The MeritorTM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided with this axle. TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH. OIL SEALS Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle. FRONT SUSPENSION Front Oshkosh TAK-4TM independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800 pounds. The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment. Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension. The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms. The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. One can adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side. The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving. REAR SUSPENSION Page 7 of 92 Rear suspension will be a Hendrickson FMX 312 EX, air ride with a ground rating of 31,000 pounds. The suspension will have the following features: - Heavy-duty shock absorbers to protect air springs from overextension - Heavy-duty torque rods and bushings - Premium, heavy-duty rubber bushings require no lubrication - Integrated stabilizer design results in greater stability - Low spring rate air springs for excellent ride quality - Dual height control valves to maintain level vehicle from side to side FIFTH WHEEL The fifth wheel will be designed to allow the tiller trailer to pivot fore & aft and be rotated. A fifth wheel lockout system will be provided to limit motion during aerial operations. The fifth wheel will also be capable of full operation up to a 14 degree breakover angle. The fifth wheel lockout system, when activated, will prevent movement between the upper and lower plates of the fifth wheel assembly. In the normal road travel condition the cylinder mounted solenoid valves will be open and will allow transfer of oil between the front and rear pair of cylinders. When the stabilizers are in their proper supporting position and as the aerial leaves the boom support, the solenoid valves will close. The closed valves will allow no oil to be transferred and the fifth wheel assembly will become rigid. A fill and a gauge port will be provided on the top of the trailer goose neck for maintenance. FENDER PANELS The chassis behind the cab will be assembled with fender panels over the wheels, running boards and steps for access to the turntable and decking over the frame rails. The fender panels will be fabricated of .125"-5052 aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength. Fender design will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance. The area over the frame rails between the cab and fifth wheel will be covered with aluminum treadplate to serve as a walkway area. The walkway area will be properly reinforced with a steel substructure attached to the frame rails. Running boards will be installed on each side directly behind the cab for access to the walkway area behind the cab and the turntable. The running boards will be covered with aluminum treadplate. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco, model XS4M, anti-lock braking system. The ABS will provide a four (4) channel anti-lock braking control on both the front, rear and tiller wheels. A digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti-lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti-lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from skidding out of control. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY The Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,000 anile parts and labor warranty provided by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems. BRAKES The service brake system will be full air type. Page 8 of 92 The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance. The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance. The rear brakes will be MeritorTM 16.50" x 8.63" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters. ENGINE BRAKE A Jacobs Engine Brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of the driver. The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high, medium and low setting. The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake lights are activated. The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required. AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM The air compressor will be a Bendix BA -921 with 15.8 cubic feet per minute output at 1250 RPM. BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system will include: - Bendix-Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface - Heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer - Total air system capacity of 5,198 cubic inches - Two (2) air pressure gauges with a red warning light and an audible alarm, that activates when air pressure falls below 60 psi - MGM spring set parking brake system - Parking brake operated by a Bendix-Westinghouse PP -1 control valve - A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel - Bendix-Westinghouse SR -1 valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, providing automatic spring brake application at 40 psi - Wabco System Saver 1200 air dryer BRAKE LINES Color -coded nylon brake lines will be provided. The lines will be wrapped in a heat protective loom in the chassis areas that are subject to excessive heat. AIR INLET/OUTLET One (1) air inlet/outlet will be installed with the female coupling located in the driver side lower step well of cab. This system will tie into the "wet" tank of the brake system and include a check valve in the inlet line and an 85 psi pressure protection valve in the outlet line. The air outlet will be controlled by a needle valve. Page 9 of 92 A mating male fitting will be provided with the loose equipment. The air inlet will allow a shoreline air hose to be connected to the vehicle. This will allow station air to be supplied to the brake system of the vehicle to insure constant air pressure. AIR TANK, ADDITIONAL An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the capacity of the air system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use. The output flow of the engine air compressor varies with engine RPM. Full compressor output is only achieved at governed engine speed. Engine speed may be limited by generators, pumps and other PTO driven options. ALL WHEEL LOCK-UP An additional all wheel lock-up system will be installed which applies air to the front brakes only. The standard spring brake control valve system will also be used for the rear. ENGINE The chassis will be powered by a Detroit Diesel electronically controlled engine as described below: - Model: Series 60, 14.01,(855 cubic inches) - Maximum Horsepower: 515 bhp at 1800 rpm - Peak Torque: 1650 lb -ft at 1200 rpm - Governed Speed: 2000 rpm - Bore and Stroke: 5.24" x 6.61" - Number of Cylinders: Six (6) - Compression Ratio: 17.25:1 Standard equipment on the engine will include the following: - Governor: Limiting speed type - Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip - Starting Motor: 12 -volt - Turbocharger - Air To Air Aftercooled - Lube Oil Cooler - Lube Oil Filter: Full flow - Air Cleaner: Farr or equal - Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve Page 10 of 92 - Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut off valves on the supply and return line (precharged with coolant inhibitor) ENGINE WARRANTY The engine will come with a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by the Detroit Diesel Corporation. CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS The following amber indicator lights will be located on the driver's side of the cab to denote engine information: - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) - High Exhaust Temperature (HET) - Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the driver's side instrument panel. ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the time of bid. ENGINE AIR INTAKE The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch. EXHAUST SYSTEM The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate filter and will be 5.00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter and a diesel oxidation catalyst to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will be provided on the exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab. Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe diffuser. ENGINE SHUTDOWN W/RESET An emergency engine shutdown, by means of incorporating a flapper over the engine air intake, will be provided with a pneumatic push -to -activate control inside the cab. A protective guard will be supplied to avoid unnecessary activation. The push -to -active control inside the cab can also be used to release the emergency shutdown, without having to tilt the cab. FUEL SEPARATOR The engine will be equipped with a Racor in-line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition to the engine fuel filters. ENGINE HEATER A 1000 watt, 120 volt, immersion type engine heater will be installed with the AC power inlet located to the rear of the driver's door. Page 11 of 92 A LED warning light and buzzer will be provided on the cab instrument panel to indicate water in the fuel system. HIGH IDLE A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activation/deactivation. The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Engage High Idle". COOLANT LINES Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant/heater lines installed by Pierce Manufacturing. Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will expand and contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a constant clamping pressure on the hose. RADIATOR The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling system standards. For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented 'Beta -Weld" process for increased strength, longer road life and solder -bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial antifreeze solutions. The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators. The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with a remote -mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a built-in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap. A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system. A heavy-duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator. CLUTCH FAN A Horton fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in "Road" and "Pump" position. FUEL TANK A 65 -gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at rear of chassis. The tank will be constructed of 12 - gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a vent. A .75" drain plug will be provided in a low point of the tank for drainage Page 12 of 92 A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side rear of the chassis on the vertical portion of the fender skirting area. The inlet will be covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel Only". A .50" diameter vent will be provided running fi-om top of tank to just below fuel fill inlet. The tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95% of tank volume. All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer. AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP An auxiliary electric fuel pump will be added to the fuel line for priming the engine. A switch located on the cab instrument panel will be provided to operate the pump. FUELSHUTOFF A shutoff valve will be installed in the fuel line, near the filter. FUEL COOLER An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line. TRANSMISSION An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 4000P, electronic, torque converting, automatic transmission will be provided. Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 8 o'clock and 1 o'clock). A transmission temperature gauge with red light and buzzer will be installed on the cab instrument panel. TRANSMISSION SHIFTER A six (6) -speed push button shift module will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation. The transmission ratio will be: 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00, 5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00. TRANSMISSION COOLER A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator. TRANSMISSION WARRANTY The transmission will have a five (5) year/unlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission. Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your Allison transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for coverage limitations. SYNTHETIC FLUID ONLY TAG A tag will be located at the transmission fill point labeled "Synthetic Fluid Only". TRANSMISSION FLUID The transmission will be provided with TranSynd, or TES 295 (generic synthetic fluid) equivalent heavy duty synthetic transmission fluid. Page 13 of 92 DRIVELINE Drivelines will be a heavy-duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer 1810 universal joints. The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation. A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft, slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat or equivalent. STEERING Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy-duty power steering, will be provided. The power steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3) -line hydraulic pump with integral pressure and flow control. The steering wheel will be: - 18.00" in diameter - Capable of tilting and telescoping - Four (4) -spoke design STEERING WARRANTY The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. TIRES Front tires will be Michelin 425/65R22.50 radials, 20 ply "all position" XZY 3 tread. The tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten (10) stud, 11.25" bolt circle. Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 3 1 5/8 0822.50 radials, 20 ply XDN2 Grip "traction" tread. The tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 9.00" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10) -stud 11.25" bolt circle. LUG NUT COVERS Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts. WHEEL CHOCKS There will be two (2) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44-E, aluminum alloy, Quick-Choc wheel blocks, with easy -grip handle provided. WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS There will be two (2) set(s) of Ziamatic SQCH-44-H horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for the Ziamatic SAC -44-E folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be mounted TBD. HUB COVERS (front) Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the front axle. An oil level viewing window will be provided. HUB COVERS (Tiller Axle) Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the tiller trailer axle. An oil level viewing window will be provided. HUB COVERS (rear) A pair of stainless steel high hat hub covers will be provided on rear axle hubs. MUD FLAPS Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels. MUD FLAPS Mud flaps will be installed behind the tiller trailer wheels of the apparatus. Page 14 of 92 TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of eight (8) tires. The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi. Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking. CAB The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by the chassis builder. Construction of the cab will consist of 5052-H32.125" aluminum welded to extruded aluminum framing. The cab will be built by the apparatus manufacturer in a facility located on the manufacturer's premises. (no exceptions) The cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50". The forward cab section will have an overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) of approximately 103.00". The crew cab section will have a 10.00" raised roof, with an overall cab height of approximately 113.00". The overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension will increase the overall height listed. The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 64.00" in the center and 69.75" in the outboard positions. The crew cab floor will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel. The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the back wall. The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the same manner as the driver and passenger doors. The cab will be a full tilt cab style. The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist. The cab will have three (3) -point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump connected to two (2) cab lift cylinders. The cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic locking mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered. The cab access steps will be 23.25" wide, crew cab will be 21.50" wide x 8.00" minimum depth and will be the half -height style door, blistered inward at the bottom. The lower exposed step area at each door location will be trimmed with aluminum treadplate and have a grip strut insert in the bottom step. The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high. Page 15 of 92 The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access. A 20.00", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist entrance into the cab. A chrome handrail will be provided inside each front cab door, for ease of entry. The cab doors will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high. The crew cab doors will be 34.25" wide x 67.00" high for easy entry, and located on the side of the cab. The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of .125". The exterior skins will be constructed from .090" aluminum. All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window. Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of the cab doors. All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles. The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed. The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin. There will be double automotive type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to ensure a weather tight fit. Full height polished stainless steel scuffplates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors. Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms. Engine hood side walls will be constructed of .50" aluminum, top will be constructed of .19" aluminum and will be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room. The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the DBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet. There will be access, 15.00" wide x 11.25" high, at the rear of the engine tunnel to access the engine fluid checks. Full circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided. Bright aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered. A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area. The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place. All cab glass will be tinted. Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers. Page 16 of 92 Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75" x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab. Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE requirements. The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab. A glove box with a drop-down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position. CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below: - European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29 - SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi -Static Loading Heavy Trucks - SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks - Roof Crush The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of the ECE 29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10 metric tons. - Side Impact The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 lb moving barrier is slammed into the side of the cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft -lbs of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident. - Frontal Impact The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft -lbs of energy using a swing -bob type platen. The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant area. CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear. CAB MODIFICATION The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required clearance to the engine and related components. The engine tunnel will include a modification on the passenger side to accommodate the Turbo and related components. CAB FLOOR The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with PolydampTM acoustical floor mat consisting of a black pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler. The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which offer a superior grip surface. Additionally, the material has a .25" thick closed cell foam (no water absorption) which offers a sound dampening material for reducing sound levels. Page 17 of 92 CREW CAB WINDOWS On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided. The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 11.29" wide x 17.95" high. WINDOW TINT Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are included: - Crew cab side windows - Crew cab door, roll -up windows - Rear opera windows (if applicable) ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush mounted automotive style switches. The drivers side lower instrument panel will also have four (4) controls, one (1) for each door window. ELECTRIC WINDOW DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Cab window roll -up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long service life. The window regulator design will complete 30,000 complete up -down cycles and still function normally when finished. The bidder will certify that sample doors and windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without malfunction or significant component wear. ELECTRIC CAB DOOR LOCKS The fi•ont driver and officer doors will have a door lock master switch. The master switches will control all cab door locks. The rear cab doors will have the standard manual lock control There will be one (1) concealed switch located in an easily accessible chassis specific location that will unlock all the doors. The lock system will include two (2) key FOBS that allow for keyless entry into the vehicle. The key FOB system will use code hopping technology for high security and be FCC part 15 compliant. KEY PAD FOR ELECTRIC DOOR LOCKS For improved convenience, the cab door locks will include a Trimark keypad entry system to provide complete keyless entry to the cab. There will be two (2) keypads provided, located one each side of the cab behind the front cab doors. The keypads will include visual and audio feedback to confirm activation and acknowledge correct entry code. For enhanced night time use, the keypads will be lighted. For increased security, the system will allow over 3000 possible code combinations. LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON HORN BUTTON The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the fire apparatus manufacturer's logo and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, eleven (11) characters in the second row and eleven (11) characters in the third row. Page 18 of 92 The first row of text will be: COSTA MESA The second row of text will be: FIRE The third row of text will be: DEPARTMENT STORAGE COMPARTMENTS Provided on each side of the cab, below the cab floor, to the rear of the crew cab access doors, will be a storage compartment. The compartments will be 11.50" wide x 14.00" deep x 18.00" high. The doors will be of the single pan construction with one (1) D -ring latch. Chain with a clear plastic covering will be used as a door stop. FENDER CROWNS Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender crowns will have a radius outside corner that will allow the fender crown to extend out further than the standard width crown, thus extending beyond the sidewall of the front tires and allow the crew cab doors to open fully. CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS A brushed stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and crew cab doors. CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS A full height stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the cab and crew cab interior doors. STRIPE (On Paint Break) There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The stripe will be on both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield. MAPBOX A map box with six (6) bins, open from top, will be installed. The map box will be divided into six (6) bins, each bin will slant 30 degrees from horizontal. The map box will be constructed of .125" aluminum and will be painted to match the cab interior. Two (2) rows of three (3) slots will measure 12.00" long x 3.00" wide. MAP POCKET Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13.50" wide x 14.00" high x 1.50" deep and constructed of stainless steel. CAB LIFT A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves. The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure. Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a convenient location. Cab will be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring-loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered. The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position. A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully raised. Before Page 19 of 92 lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control located near the cab raise/lower switch. INTERLOCK, CAB LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the parking brake is released the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled. MIRRORS A Velvac, model 2010, west coast mirror will be mounted on each side of the front cab door. Mirror dimensions will be 7.00" wide x 16.00" high, and will be heated and motorized. The shell will be bright annealed stainless steel. Both mirrors will be heated and have a remote control that is convenient to the driver. BUMPER A one (1) piece, ten (10) -gauge 304-2B polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of 10.00" high, will be attached to the front of the chassis frame. A 9.00" formed steel channel will be mounted directly behind bumper for additional strength LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems. The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame. GRAVEL PAN A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face TOW HOOKS No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow eyes. CAB INTERIOR The cab dash fascias will be a flat faced design to provide easy of maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum. The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and mildew. The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyl. A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling. Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit. CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray. INTERIOR PAINT (Cab Page 20 of 92 A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture paint. GRAB HANDLE A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the post area between the door and steering wheel column. A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer. DRIVER SEAT A Seats Inc. #911 "scissors -action" air -ride high -back style seat will be provided in the cab for the driver. The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. The seat back will be removable for ease of access to components located behind the driver seat. OFFICER SEAT A Seats Inc. #911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the officer. The officer's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. FORWARD FACING PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab. The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in the up position. The seat will be furnished with a three-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractors. FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT There will be one (1) forward facing, Seats Incorporated 911 fold -up SCBA style seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew cab. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable front to rear in 0.50" increments to accommodate different size SCBA bottles. Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating and rebolting in the desired location The seat will be furnished with a three three-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with automatic retractors. Extensions will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. RADIO COMPARTMENT A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat. The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high. A drop-down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access Page 21 of 92 The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior. SEAT UPHOLSTERY All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material. AIR BOTTLE HOLDERS All SCBA type seats in the cab will have a "Hands -Free" auto clamp style bracket in its backrest. For efficiency and convenience, the bracket will include an automatic spring clamp that allows the occupant to store the SCBA bottle by simply pushing it into the seat back. For protection of all occupants in the cab, in the event of an accident, the inertial components within the clamp will constrain the SCBA bottle in the seat and will exceed the NFPA standard of 9G. Bracket designs with manual restraints (belts, straps, buckles) that could be inadvertently left unlocked and allow the SCBA to move freely within the cab during an accident, will not be acceptable. There will be a quantity of one (1) SCBA brackets. SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT All seating positions furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment. This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefighter. SEAT BELTS All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts. SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 lbs of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria. SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria. SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten (10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab with green and red LED indicators as follows: Seat Occupied Buckled Green Seat Occupied Unbuckled Red No Occupant Buckled Red No Occupant Unbuckled Not Illuminated The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park. HELMET HOLDER There will be two (2) Zico UHH-1 helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The brackets will provide quick access and secure storage of the helmet(s). The bracket location(s) will be determined at time of final Page 22 of 92 inspection at Pierce mfg CAB WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its custom fire and/or rescue vehicle cab are free of defects in design or workmanship in the cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural components identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHT An engine compartment light will be installed under the engine hood, of which the switch is an integral part. Light will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention. CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of. - Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, red/clear dome light located, one (1) on the officer side and one (1) on the driver side, controlled by the following: Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch. Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch. - Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling. CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of. - Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, Red/Clear dome lights located one (1) each side, controlled by the following: Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch. Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch. - A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches STEP LIGHTS For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) Ritar, Model M27HW2, LED, step lights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door, one (1) per step, in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep. The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened. CAB DEFROSTER There will be a 41,000 BTU/hr defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel. Page 23 of 92 The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily removable for maintenance. The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows. CAB/CREW CAB HEATER Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU/hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow. The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser. CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems Test Procedure and Performance Requirements - Trucks, Buses, and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE J381 criteria. CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel, whether in -transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE J381. The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria. AIR CONDITIONING HOUSINGS The housings protecting the air conditioning units on either side of the cab will be fabricated from smooth aluminum and painted to match the exterior of the cab roof, in place of the standard 4 -way aluminum. AIR CONDITIONING A high performance, customized air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab. A 19.1 cubic inch compressor will be installed on the engine. The air conditioning system will be capable of cooling the average cab temperature from 100 degrees Fahrenheit to 78 degrees Fahrenheit within 30 minutes at 50% relative humidity. The cooling performance test will be run only after the cab has been heat soaked at 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 4 hours. A combination condensor and evaporator with a BTU rating sufficient to meet the performance specification will be installed on each side of the cab roof. The evaporator unit will have a BTU rating sufficient to meet and exceed the performance specifications. Adjustable air outlets will be strategically located on the evaporator cover as follows: Two (2) will be directed towards the drivers location Two (2) will be directed towards the officers location Eight (8) will be directed towards the crew cab area The air conditioner refrigerant will be R- 134A, installed by a certified technician. The air conditioner will be controlled by a single electronic control panel. For ease of operation, the Page 24 of 92 control panel will include variable adjustment for temperature and fan control and be conveniently located on the dash in clear view of the driver. The control panel will include robust knobs for both fan speed and temperature adjustment. INTERIOR CAB INSULATION The cab will be insulated with 1.50" insulation in the ceiling and side walls, 2.00" in the rear wall, and 1.00" insulation on the slant of a raised roof to reduce heat transfer into the cab. The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal panel painted to match the interior. An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning housing. The light will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements. CAB INSTRUMENTATION The cab instrument panel will include gauges, telltale indicator lamps, control switches, alarms, and a diagnostic panel. The function of the instrument panel controls and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located within the forward cab section, forward of the driver. The gauge assembly and switch panels are designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership. GAUGES The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) black faced gauges with black bezels to monitor vehicle performance: Voltmeter gauge (volts): Low volts (11.8 VDC) Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm High volts (15.5 VDC) Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Engine Tachometer (RPM) Speedometer MPH Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions): Low fuel (1/8 full) Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Engine Oil pressure Gauge (PSI) Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Front Air Pressure Gauges (PSI) Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Rear Air Pressure Gauges (PSI) Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit): High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit): High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarms Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm INDICATOR LAMPS Page 25 of 92 To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be located on the instrument panel in clear view of the driver. The indicator lamps will be "dead -front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have descriptive text or symbols. The following amber telltale lamps will be present: Low coolant Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable) Check engine Check trans (check transmission) Air rest (air restriction) Driver door open Passenger door open Tower (tower raised) (where applicable) DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration) HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable) ABS (antilock brake system) MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable) Regen inhibit (engine emissions regeneration inhibit) (where applicable) Trans temp (transmission temperature) Side roll fault (where applicable) Front air bag fault (where applicable) Aux brake overheat (auxiliary brake overheat) (where applicable) The following red telltale lamps will be present: Ladder rack down Parking brake Stop engine The following green telltale lamps will be present: Left turn Right turn Battery on Ignition Aux brake (auxiliary brake engaged)(where applicable) The following blue telltale lamps will be present: High beam ALARMS Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message is present. INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE -OUT A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms located on the cab instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove -out when the ignition switch is held in the up position for 3-5 seconds to ensure proper performance. CONTROL SWITCHES For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications. Head]ight/Parking light switch: A three (3) position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate all parking and headlights. The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch will activate the headlights. Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A variable voltage control switch will be provided. The Page 26 of 92 switch moved in the up direction increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum and the switch moved in a down direction decreases the panel backlighting intensity to a minimum level. Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained/maintained/momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will perform prove -out on the telltale indicators and alarms when the ignition switch is held in the up position for 3-5 seconds to ensure proper performance. A green indicator lamp is activated with vehicle ignition. Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation. Hazard switch will be incorporated into the steering column. Heater and defroster controls. Turn signal arm: A self -canceling turn signal with high beam headlight controls. Windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes. Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control. Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the steering wheel. CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to five (5) switch panels in the engine tunnel console, and up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications. High idle engagement switch: A maintained rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. The switch will activate and deactivate the high idle function. The OK TO ENGAGE HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged. OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement. Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable) Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable) DIAGNOSTIC PANEL A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and will be located inside the driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a problem exist. The diagnostic panel will include the following: Engine diagnostic port Transmission and ABS diagnostic port Page 27 of 92 Roll sensor diagnostic port Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator) ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator). - Air Restriction Indicator (electronic with indicator light) WIPER CONTROL Wiper control will consist of a two (2) -speed individual windshield wiper control with intermittent feature and windshield washer controls. The control will also have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to return to the stored position when the wipers are not in use. WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE J198 Windshield Wiper Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met these criteria. - Ammeter. HOURMETER - AERIAL DEVICE A hourmeter for the aerial device will be provided and located within the cab display or instrument panel. AERIAL MASTER There will be a master switch for the aerial operating electrical system provided. LABEL, EMERGENCY LIGHT SWITCHES The emergency light switch labels will have the "NFPA" text omitted. Each switch will be labeled for its normal function (example: Roof Light, Front Warning, etc.). RADIO WITH CD PLAYER A Panasonic AM/FM/Weatherband stereo radio with compact disc player and a jack for a MP -3 player will be installed. The compact disc stereo radio will be mounted within reach of the driver. The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (1) pair of 5.25" speakers located in the cab and one (1) pair of 5.25" speakers located in the crew cab. The type and location of the antenna will be a roof -mounted rubber antenna located in an open space, on the cab roof. This radio will be installed without remote control. SWIVEL MOUNT There will be one (1) Johnny Ray, Model 203 swivel mount bracket(s) provided for the fire department's radio equipment. The swivel mount bracket(s) will be located at center of ceiling. RADIO ANTENNA MOUNT An antenna -mounting base, Model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and weatherproof cap will be provided for a two-way radio. The mount will be located on the cab roof just to the rear of the officer seat. The cable will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for customer to route to the instrument panel if needed. Page 28 of 92 SWITCH PANELS The built-in emergency light switch panel will have a master switch plus individual switches for selective control. The switch panel will be located in the "overhead" position above the windshield on the driver's side to allow for easy access. Switches will be rocker type with an indicator light, of which is an integral part of the switch. ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM A compartment will be provided in or under the cab to house the vehicles electrical power and signal circuit protection and control components. The power and signal protection and control compartment will contain circuit protection devices and power control devices. Power and signal protection and control components will be protected against corrosion, excessive heat, excessive vibration, physical damage and water spray. Serviceable components will be readily accessible Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standard, will be utilized to protect each circuit. All circuit protection devices will be sized to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General protection circuit breakers will be Type -I automatic reset (continuously resetting) and conform to SAE J553 or J258. PTO power circuits will be protected by Type III manual reset non -cycling circuit breakers conforming to SAE J553 or J258 which remain open until manually reset. When required, automotive type fuses conforming to SAE J554, J1284, J1888 or J2077 will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Power control relays and solenoids will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125 percent of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected. Visual status indicators will be supplied to identify control safety interlocks and vehicle status. In addition to visual status indicators, audible alarms designed to provide early warning of problems before they become critical will be used. VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM A voltage monitor system will be provided to indicate the status of each battery system connected to the vehicles electrical load. The monitor system will provide visual and audio warning when the system voltage is above or below optimum levels. POWER AND GROUND STUD A 12 -volt power stud and a grounding stud will be provided in the electrical component compartment for 2 -way radio equipment. EMURFI PROTECTION The electrical system proposed will include means to control undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency emissions. State of the art electrical system design and components will be used to insure radiated and conducted EMI (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference) emissions are suppressed at their source. The apparatus proposed will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically found in fire ground operations. The contractor will be able to demonstrate the EMI and RFI testing has been done on similar apparatus and certifies that the vehicle proposed meets SAE J551 requirements. EMI/RFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying immune circuit designs, shielding, twisted pair wiring and filtering. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low level control signals and high powered 2 -way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to Page 29 of 92 minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI -RFI susceptibility. INFORMATION CENTER An information center employing a 7" diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an ABS plastic housing. The information center will have the following specifications: - Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees F - An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens - Five weather resistant user interface switches - Black enclosure with gray decal - Sunlight Readable - Linux operating system - Minimum of 400nits rated display OPERATION The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use. The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion. A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on the LCD. Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will return the information center to the vehicle information screens. A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens. All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed. GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green background will be used. If a caution or warning situation arises the following will occur: - An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition. - A red background/text color will indicate a warning condition. Every screen will include the following: - Exterior Ambient Temperature - Time (12 or 24 hour mode) - Text Alert Center: - The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center messages. - Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have a button label with no text. PAGESCREENS The Information center will include the following screens: Page 30 of 92 Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will provide: - Description of the load - Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur. - Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed. "At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following devices will be indicated: - Driver Side Cab Door - Passenger's Side Cab Door - Driver Side Crew Cab Door - Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door - Driver Side Body Doors - Passenger's Side Body Doors - Rear Body Door(s) - Ladder Rack (if applicable) - Deck Gun (if applicable) - Light Tower (if applicable) - Hatch Door (if applicable) - Stabilizers (if applicable) - Steps (if applicable) - Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved, will cause an "Alert Center" message if the parking brake is disengaged. Chassis Information: The following information will be shown: - Engine RPM - Fuel Level - Battery Voltage - Engine Coolant Temperature - Engine Oil Pressure "At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active text messages. The list items text will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center". The date and time the message occurred is displayed with each message in the list. MENU SCREENS The following screens will be available through the Menu button: View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle information: - Battery Volts - Pump Hours - Transmission Oil Temperature - Pump Engaged - Engine Coolant Level - Engine Oil Level - Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running Page 31 of 92 - Power Steering Level Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness: - Brightness: Increase and decrease - Default setting button Configure Video Mode: - Set Video Contrast - Set Video Color - Set Video Tint Set Startup Screen: - Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up Set Date & Time: - 12 or 24 hour format - Set time - Set date View Active Alarms: - Shows a list of all active alarms - Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm - Silence alarms - All alarms are silenced System Diagnostics: - Module type and ID number - Module version - Module diagnostics information: - Input or output number - Circuit number connected to that input or output - Circuit name (item connected to the circuit) - Status of the input or output - Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information Button functions and button labels may change with each screen. VEHICLE DATA RECORDER A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from 8VDC to 16VDC. The VDR will not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications that may exist on the CAN data link during the power up, initialization, runtime, or power down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of power or at voltages below 8VDC for a minimum of IOms. The vehicle data recorder will be capable of recording the following data via hardwired and/or CAN inputs: Vehicle Speed - MPH Acceleration - MPH/sec Deceleration - MPH/sec Engine Speed - RPM Engine Throttle Position - % of Full Throttle ABS Event- On/Off Seat Occupied Status - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity) Page 32 of 92 Seat Belt Buckled Status - Master Optical Warning Device Switch - Time - Date - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity) On/Off 24 Hour Time Year/Month/Day INTERCOM SYSTEM A ten (10) position, David Clark, model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at three (3) positions will be provided. The driver, officer, six (6) crew cab, turntable, and tiller cab locations will have intercom capability. The driver, officer, and turntable will have radio interface capability. - Driver position will have radio interface capability. - Officer position will have radio interface capability. - Turntable position will have radio interface capability. - Six (6) Crew will have intercom only - One (1) Tiller Cab will have intercom only The following components will be supplied with this system: - One (1)-U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew). - Two (2)-U3806 Dual Headset Intercom Stations (4 Crew). - One (1)-U3815 Radio Interface Module (Officer). - One (1)-U3811 Radio Interface Module (Driver). - One (1)-U3815A Radio Interface Module (Pump Panel). - One (1)-U3801 Intercom Only Single Headset Module (Tiller Cab). - Two (2)-C3023 Headset Belt Station (Turntable, Tiller Cab). - Seven (7)-H3342 Headsets. (Officer, 6 Crew). - One (1)-H3341 Single Ear Headsets. (Driver/Turntable). - One (1)-U3805 Radio Cord Junction Module. - Eight (8) Headset Hangar Hooks All necessary cables and connectors will be provided. RADIO INTERFACE Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio interface adapter is not required for this application. CAB ROOF COVERING Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and fastening screws will Page 33 of 92 be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum. Front and side warning lights will not be mounted on top of treadplate. The treadplate will extend and terminate next to the warning lights. BATTERY SYSTEM Six (6) 12 volt, Deka Model 1131XMF batteries that include the following features will be provided: - 1000 CCA (cold cranking amps) - 185 reserve capacity - High cycle - Maintenance free - Group 31 - Rating of 6000 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit - 1110 minutes of reserve capacity - Threaded posts BATTERY SYSTEM A single starting system will be provided. An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel. MASTER BATTERY SWITCH A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within easy reach of the driver. An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery system. BATTERY COMPARTMENTS Batteries will be placed on non -corrosive mats and be stored in well -ventilated compartments located under the cab. The battery hold-downs will be of a non -corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel. Heavy-duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be color -coded. Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti -corrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi-permanent rubberized compound. There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals. JUMPER STUDS One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the front side of battery box on the driver's side. This will allow enough room for easy jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for positive/negative terminals. BATTERY CHARGER A Newmar model PT -40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A Newmar DC Volt Meter, model DCV indicating the state of charge will be included. The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the batteries. The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the power is connected. Page 34 of 92 Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted Compartment behind cab. The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser. CHARGING INDICATOR A green indicator light, remote mounted next to the battery charger receptacle, will be provided. The light will indicate when the battery charging receptacle is active. DUAL ALTERNATORS A pair of Leece-Neville 270 amp alternators will be provided. They will have a rated output current of 540 amps, as measured by SAE method J56. The alternators will feature an integral, fail-safe regulator and rectifier. The alternators will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy-duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator output. RADIO ANTENNA MOUNTS There will be three (3) antenna mounting bases, Model MATM with 25 feet of coax cable and weatherproof caps provided. The mounts will be located cab roof. The cable will be routed across roof behind lightbar. SPEAKERS There will be one (1) radio speakers with volume control provided. Wiring will be routed from the speakers and volume control to Flush mount in tiller cab drivers side. Speakers will be located N/A. SPARE CIRCUIT There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate 2 at rear forward facibg seats and 2 at dash at Driver and Officer. Tennination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover. Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set. SPARE CIRCUIT There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate 2 on back of engine doghouse. Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover. Page 35 of 92 Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set. SPARE CIRCUIT There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate at base of each rear facing EMS Compartment. Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip. Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set. SPARE CIRCUIT There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus. The above wires will have the following features: The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power. The negative wire will be connected to ground. Wires will be protected to 20 amps at 12 volts DC. Power and ground will terminate Behind each seat driver and officer. Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip. Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection. This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set. ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGEMENT A Kussmaul electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12 -volt electrical system, and automatically reduces the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition and by doing so, ensures the integrity of the electrical system. The ELM will monitor the vehicle's voltage while at the scene (parking brake applied). It will sequentially shut down individual electrical loads when the system voltage drops below a preset value. Ten (10) separate electrical loads will be controlled by the load manager. The ELM will sequentially re-energize electrical loads as the system voltage recovers. The (ELM) will also include a sequencer function which will be used to enable channels 1-5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The (ELM) will sequentially re-energize electrical loads as the system voltage recovers. SEQUENCER A warning light sequencer will be provided that automatically turns the emergency lights on and off in a preset sequence. The sequencer will be wired in conjunction with the emergency master light switch. When the switch is activated the lights will be turned on in sequence one by one at 1/2 second intervals thereby Page 36 of 92 protecting the alternator from power surges. When turned off the same process will deactivate the warning lights in sequence to allow a gradual decrease in alternator output, rather than dumping the load. AMP DRAW REPORT The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system. The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following: 1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests. 2) A written load analysis, which will include the following: A) The nameplate rating of the alternator. B) The alternator rating under the conditions specified per: Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per: Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the total connected load. E) Each individual intermittent load. All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). EXTERIOR LIGHTING Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at time of proposal. Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim housing. The LED directional lights will wrap-around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The headlight and LED directional lights will be in the same assembly. Five (5) LED clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the cab. WARNING LIGHTS (Cab Face) Two (2) pair of Whelen model 60*OOF*R LED lights will be installed on the cab face, above the headlights, mounted in a common bezel. The outer LEDS will be required for NFPA and will meet or exceed the NFPA required light output for the front lower zone. The color of these LEDs will be red Super LED/red lens. The inner LEDs will be additional lighting. The color of these lights will be red Super LED/red lens. Both sets of lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab. BACK-UP ALARM An ECCO, Model SA917-PM2, solid-state electronic audible back-up alarm that actuates when the truck is Page 37 of 92 shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels. MANUAL, FIRE APPARATUS PARTS Two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy with the completed unit. One (1) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual. The manual will contain the following: - Job number - Part numbers with full descriptions - Table of contents - Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly - Parts section sorted in Alphabetical order - Instructions on how to locate a parts The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies. SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE The service parts information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website. The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly. MANUALS, CHASSIS SERVICE Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components will be provided with the completed unit. One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual. The manuals will contain the following sections: - Job number - Table of contents - Troubleshooting - Front Axle/Suspension - Brakes - Engine - Tires - Wheels - Cab - Electrical, DC - Air Systems - Plumbing - Appendix The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies. MANUALS, CHASSIS OPERATION Page 38 of 92 Two (2) chassis operation manuals will be provided. One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual COMMAND ZONE WARRANTY The Command Zone modules, membrane switches, and display(s) will be warranted against defective materials or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. The warranty will also include a standard repair time for covered components. A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid. ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be provided. HOSE RESTRAINT The hose in the hosebed will be restrained by black nylon velcro straps at the top of the hosebed. The straps will be installed at the top of the hosebed side sheets. TOW EYES Two (2) rear painted "tow" eyes will be located at the rear of the apparatus and will be mounted directly to the torque box. The inner and outer edges of the tow eyes will be radiused. COMPARTMENTATION Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125", 5052-H32 aluminum with a tensile strength range of 31,000 to 38,000 psi. Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders. Circular fender liners will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance. Compartment flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the compartment door lip. The compartment door opening will be framed by flanging the edges in 1.75" and bending out again .75" to form an angle. Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion or formed bright aluminum treadplate. The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the corners "TIG" welded. Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops. All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to prevent injury. AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards. LOUVERS All body compartments will have a minimum of one (1) set of louvers stamped into a wall to provide the proper airflow inside the compartment and to prevent water from dripping into the compartment. These louvers will be formed into the metal and not added to the compartment as a separate plate. BODY WARRANTY A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid. The warranty will state that the body will be free of structural failures caused by defective design or workmanship for a warranty period of ten (10) years from the date the new vehicle is first delivered or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first and that defective parts, under the warranty, will be repaired or replaced without charge to the original purchaser. TRACTOR RESERVOIR COMPARTMENT A compartment will be provided ahead of the tractor fifth wheel. Page 39 of 92 The compartment will be 30.00" wide x 37.75" high x 8.00" deep. The door opening will be 25.50" wide x 31.25" high. The transverse section will be 19.38" wide x 15.50" high. The compartment will be fabricated out of smooth aluminum painted job color. Bright aluminum treadplate will be provided on the top of the compartment. The compartment will be furnished with a vertically hinged, lap style compartment door on each side that have a D handle latch and positive door hold open device. COMPARTMENTATION. DRIVER SIDE Driver side compartmentation will consist of the following: Two (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the driver side. Each compartment will be full -height. The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The upper 38.75" of each compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front compartmentation. Both compartments will have roll -up doors. Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the driver side. Each compartment will be full -height. The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The upper 38.75" of the forward compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front compartmentation. The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. Both compartments will have roll -up doors. Two (2) compartments will be provided in the rear body section on the driver side. The forward compartment will be 69.00" wide x 49.63" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of 63.50" wide x 45.75" high. This compartment will be located ahead of the rear wheels. The rearward compartment will be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of 43.50" wide x 45.75" high. This compartment will be located behind the rear wheels. Both compartments will have roll -up doors. COMPARTMENTATION PASSENGER SIDE Passenger side compartmentation will consist of the following: Page 40 of 92 Two (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the passenger side. Each compartment will be full-height. The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The upper 38.75" of each compartment will be transverse to the driver side front compartmentation. Both compartments will have roll-up doors. Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the passenger side. Each compartment will be full-height. The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. The upper 38.75" of the forward compartment will be transverse to the driver side front compartmentation. The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00" wide x 47.75" high. Both compartments will have roll-up doors. Two (2) compartments shall be provided in the rear body section on the passenger side. The forward compartment shall be 69.00" wide x 24.13" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of 63.50" wide x 18.75" high. This compartment shall be located ahead of the rear wheels. The rearward compartment shall be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of 43.50" wide x 45.75" high. This compartment shall be located behind the rear wheels. Both compartments shall have roll-up doors. ROLL-UP DOOR Twelve (12) compartment doors will be installed on the side compartments, double faced, aluminum construction, painted one color to match the lower portion of the body and manufactured by A&A Manufacturing (Gortite). Lath sections will be an uiterlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without complete disassembly of door. Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal contact and prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to operate in extreme temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Side, top and bottom seals will be provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be made of Santoprene. All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be acceptable. Page 41 of 92 A polished stainless steel lift bar with locking key latches shall be provided for each roll -up door. The keys shall be model #75 Ito match all compartment doors and cab doors. will be provided for opening door. Lift bar will be located at the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors frame. A ledge will be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door. Doors will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat will be flat. The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose equipment from jamming the door from inside. To conserve space in the compartments, the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in diameter. A roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will not acceptable. The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00". A heavy-duty magnetic switch will be used for control of "open compartment door" warning lights. All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered under this warranty will be to the original owner. Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of six (6) years after delivery to the original purchaser, A&A Manufacturing Inc. ("A&A") warrants to the user that its roll up doors (if painted) are free of blistering, peeling, bubbling, or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint material selection for exterior surfaces of the roll up doors. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service, which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity, the buyer must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any: Months Adhesion Blistering Bubbling Corrosion Cracking Gloss Color Retention 0 to 12 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 13 to 24 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 25 to 36 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 37 to 48 50% 50% 50% 50% 100% 100% 100% 49 to 60 25% 25% 25% 25% 50% 50% 50% 61 to 72 25% 25% 25% 25% 50% 50% 50%. In addition, the door will also be warranted against corrosion perforation for a period of ten (10) years. DOOR GUARD Twelve (12) compartment doors will include a guard/drip pan designed to protect the roll -up door from damage when in the retracted position and contain any water spray. The guard will be fabricated from stainless steel and installed at each roll up door. KEYED LOCK(S) A keyed lock will be furnished for Twelve (12) compartment doors. The compartmentation, to have a keyed lock, will be All roll up doors. Page 42 of 92 DOOR FRAME SCUFFPLATE Thirteen (13) scuffplates will be provided for the lower door frame(s) all roll ups and rear ladder compartment. Each scuffplate will be brushed stainless steel with a .38" lip down. PULL-OUT TRAY There will six (6) slide -out trays, without sides, and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position. Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of dependable service. Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and 'but" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand. Tray location will be D3, D4, D5 and P3, P4, P5. Heavy-duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body. PULL-OUT TRAY There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position. Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of dependable service. Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and 'but" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand. Tray location will be TBD. Heavy-duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body. PULL-OUT ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT TRAY There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position. Slides will be Jonathan brand with ball bearings for ease of operation and years of dependable service. Tray location will be To be determined. Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and 'but" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be located at the fi•ont of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand. Each tray will be adjustable up and down within the compartment. TWO (2) -WAY UTILITY TRAY There will be two (2) slide -out trays provided. The capacity rating will be 500 pounds minimum in the extended position. Interior tray dimensions will be 85.00" long x 4.00" deep x as wide as possible for the compartment Page 43 of 92 Tray will slide out to either side of the vehicle; two-thirds (2/3) of its length. The vertical location of the tray within the compartment will be adjustable. The construction will consist of .188" thick aluminum for the tray bottom, and special aluminum extrusions for the tray sides, end, and tracks. Corners will be welded to form a rigid unit. Tray will be supported with a minimum of six (6) ball bearing rollers; each rated for a minimum 500 pound load. Automatic locks will be provided for both the in and out tray positions. to be determined. CABINET one (1) cabinet(s) with motion latch aluminum drawers will be provided. Each cabinets will include four (4) drawers. The cabinet(s) will have two (2) drawers that are 3.00" tall and two (2) drawers that are 6.00" tall. The drawers will be stacked one above the other, starting with the 6.00" drawers on the bottom. The color of the cabinet(s) will be grey. The location of the cabinet(s) will be Compartment D-6 Drivers side next to air kwik and next to divider. PARTITION, VERTICAL COMPARTMENT Two (2) partitions will be bolted in D-5 /P-5. Each partition will be the full vertical height of the compartment. FLOOR EXTENSION There will be a compartment floor extension provided frame rails to within an inch of the compartment door. 1.00" return flange. A total of one (1) will be provided and located D-6 P-6. The floor extension will extend from the area over the The floor extension will have a 2.00" vertical lip and a TROUGH, STORAGE A trough shall be provided to store a stokes basket in above compartment D-2. The trough shall be approximately 80.00" long x 1.00" high x 25.00" wide. The trough shall transverse from one side of the body to the other. The trough shall be fabricated from smooth aluminum and have a treadplate, drop down door on each end. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES There will be six (6) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf construction will consist of .125" pan -shaped aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track. The location will be to be determined. Page 44 of 92 MOUNTING TRACKS There will be twelve (12) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in 1 set tracks in each compartment. These tracks will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s). RUB RAIL Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub rail. Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity. The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement in the event of damage. BODY FENDER CROWNS Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings. These fender crowns must be wide enough to prevent splashing onto the body from the 315/80822.5 tires on a 30,000# rear axle. A rubber welting will be provided between the body and the crown to seal the seam and restrict moisture from entering. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the fender sheet metal to prevent corrosion. AIR BOTTLE STORAGE BIN A storage bin will be provided for storage of ten (10) air bottles. This storage bin will be installed P-2. Each separate air bottle storage compartment will be 7.50" square x 23.00" deep. The storage bin will be formed out of aluminum and the flooring lined with rubber. EXTENSION LADDER There will be two (2) 35', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo -Safety, Series 1200-A extension ladder(s) provided. ADDED EXTENSION LADDER There will be a 30', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo -Safety Series 1200A extension ladder provided. EXTENSION LADDERS, AERIAL, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.7.2 requires two (2) extension ladders. The extension ladders are not on the apparatus as manufactured. There will be extension ladder(s) provided and installed by the fire department. The ladder(s) will be a. ROOF LADDER There will be one (1) 16' aluminum, Duo -Safety, Series 875-A roof ladder(s) provided. ADDED ROOF LADDER There will be one (1) 20' roof, aluminum, Series 875-A provided. FOLDING LADDER, AERIAL There will be a 12' aluminum, Duo -Safety, Series 585-A folding ladder provided. GROUND LADDER STORAGE The ground ladders will be stored within the torque box and be removable from the rear. Ladders will be enclosed to prevent road d r -t and debris from fouling or damaging the ladders. The ladders will rest in full- length stainless steel slides and are arranged in such a manner that any one (1) ladder can be removed without Page 45 of 92 having to move or remove any other ladder. A Gortite roll-up door will be provided at the rear, double faced, aluminum construction, painted one color to match the lower portion of the body and manufactured by A&A Manufacturing (Gortite). The latching mechanism will consist of a full length lift bar lock with latches on the outer extrusion of the door frame. A door guard will be provided to prevent tools inside the torque box from damaging the roll-up door. An aluminum treadplate box, for a model 17 Lil' Giant ladder, will be mounted above body with stoakesabove D-2 and P-2. A velcro strap with footman loops will secure the ladder. One (1) 10' aluminum, Series 585-A Duo-Safety folding ladder will be installed in a U-shaped trough inside the ladder storage compartment. One Model 10102 Little Giant folding ladder will be provided. The stored dimensions will be 55.00" high x 24.50" wide x 8.00" deep. The weight will be 35 pounds. PIKE POLES There will be one (1) 12 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I-beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment. PIKE POLE 8 FT There will be one (1) 8 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment. PIKE POLE 6 FT There will be one (1) 6 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment. PIKE POLE 3 FT There will be one (1) 3 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass shaft and "D" handles shipped loose. - two (2) 10 foot Nupla Ventilation Hook(s): Fiberglass w/"D" handle ROPE TIE DOWNS two (2) pair of rope tie downs will be provided at the tiller trailer gooseneck area. Equal quantities will be provided on each side.The tie downs will be rated for a maximum 6000 pounds. ELECTRICAL All 12-volt electrical equipment installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to modern automotive practices. All wiring will be high temperature type. Wiring will be run in loom, where exposed, and have grommets where wire passes through sheet metal. Automatic reset circuit breakers will be provided which conform to SAE Standards. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. Exterior exposed wire connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids. Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines: (1) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon. Large fender washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof. (2) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not Page 46 of 92 allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body. (3) Electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will not be fastened with nuts and bolts. Metal screws will be used in mounting these devices. Also a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from mounting area for inspection and service work. (4) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to all terminal plugs located outside of the cab or body. All non -waterproof connections will require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation (of the plug). (5) All lights that have their sockets in a weather exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area. (6) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have silicon (1890) applied completely over the metal portion of the terminal. All emergency light switches will be mounted on a separate panel installed in the cab. A master warning light switch and individual switches will be provided to allow pre -selection of emergency lights. The light switches will be "rocker" type with an internal indicator light to show when switch is energized. All switches will be properly identified and mounted in a removable panel for ease in servicing. Identification of the switches will be done by either printing or etching on the switch panel. The switches and identification will be illuminated. All lights and reflectors, required to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard #108, will be furnished. Rear identification lights will be recessed mounted for protection. Lights and wiring mounted in the rear bulkheads will be protected from damage by installing a false bulkhead inside the rear compartments. An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order. The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery. STEP LIGHTS There will be a total of sixteen (16) Ri-Tar, Model M27-06HW2 Super LED step lights provided for access to the tiller cab and turntable. The step lights will be actuated by the aerial master switch in the cab. All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901. REAR FMVSS LIGHTING The rear stop/tail and directional LED lighting will consist of the following: Two (2) Whelen model 60ROOXRR red LED stop/tail lights. Two (2) Whelen model 60A00TAR amber LED arrow turn lights. Each light will be installed separately at the rear with a flange. Four (4) red reflectors will be provided. A Weldon, Model 23882-2600-00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side above the warning lights. A Weldon, Model 9186-23882-30, step lamp will illuminate the license plate. Two (2) Peterson, Model M-392, backup lights will be provided. Page 47 of 92 REAR ID/MARKER DOT LIGHTING The three (3) identification lights located at the rear will be installed per the following: Ri-Tar, Model M27, LED As close as practical to the vertical centerline. Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches apart. Red in color. All at the same height. The four (4) clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following: Ri-Tar, Model M27, LED To indicate the overall width of the vehicle. One (1) each side of the vertical centerline. All at the same height. As near the top as practical. To be visible from the rear and the side. One (1) each side, facing the side. One (1) each side, facing the rear. Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements. MAP LIGHT One (1) map light with goose neck with switch control on base of light will be provided. Each map light will be a Sunnex, model 742, with red lens and be located pass side dash by A pillar. Each map light will be provided with an 20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount. MARKER LIGHTS There will be 12 lights of Truck -Lite, model 35200, LED, marker lights installed on this apparatus. The marker lights will be wired to the running lights of the vehicle. The lights will be located where required to meet DOT. These lights will be installed either recessed or with metal flanges to protect them from most damage. Yellow lights will be installed in any location forward of the rear most point of the vehicle. A single red light will be installed at the rear most point only. MARKER LIGHTS There will be one (1) pair of amber and red LED marker lights with rubber arm, located at rear sides. The amber lens will face the front and the red lens will face the rear of the truck. These lights will be activated with the running lights of the vehicle. "DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR A Whelen Model L32LRF red LED indicator beacon, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light Is On". The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate chassis electric horn intermittently when the parking brake is released. OPEN DOOR INDICATOR LIGHT Two (2) red indicator lights will be provided and located in clear view of the driver, warning of an open Page 48 of 92 passenger or equipment compartment door. One (1) light will indicate status of doors on the driver's side of the vehicle and the other light will indicate the status of the passenger side and rear compartment doors. COMPARTMENT LIGHTING There will be 14 compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light strips. The compartments with these strip lights will be located all roll up door compartments. Two (2) strip lights will be installed vertically, one (1) each side of the compartment door opening. The lights will be sized to accomodate the compartment door opening. The remaining compartments will include 6.00" diameter Truck -Lite, Model: 79384, lights in each enclosed compartment. Each light will have a number 1076 one filament, two wire bulb. Opening the compartment door, will automatically turn the compartment lighting on. PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, CAB There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for each cab door. Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the driver, officer, and crew cab riding area exits, which will be activated automatically when the exit doors are opened and by the same means as the body perimeter lights. The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot-candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS BODY There will be two (2) Truck -Lite model 60 lights provided under the rear step area. The lights will be spaced one (1) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be activated by a rocker switch in cab and a switch at the rear of the body. The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot-candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for personnel to climb onto the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level. SCENE LIGHTS one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60*000*U, halogen scene lights will be installed at rear of tiller cab. These lights will have 26 degree internal optics. The lights will be controlled by the following: From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel. From the second switch feature, a control from a switch in the tillerman's cab. From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option. From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option These lights will be installed with a flange. SIDE SCENE LIGHTS one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60F000*U scene lights will be installed side of crew cab 1 each side. These lights will have a 26 degree internal optics to redirect light downward. Page 49 of 92 The lights will be controlled by the following: From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option These lights will be installed with a flange SIDE SCENE LIGHTS two (2) pairs of Zico, Model: ZQL-SS-LED, LED scene lights with bright stainless steel housing will be installed In tiller axles fenderwell. The lights will be controlled by N/A. SCENE LIGHTS One (1) pair of Weldon 3010 Series rectangular scene lights will be installed on the rear exterior wall of the tractor cab. The lights will have a clear lens 26 degree internal optics. The lights will be controlled by the aerial master switch. CENTERING LIGHT Two (2) lights will be provided on the cab roof to aid the tillerman in centering the tiller trailer with the tractor One (1) Weldon Model 9186-1500-50 green LED light will be installed on the tractor roof as far rearward on the cab as practical that will be used by the tillerman to center the tiller trailer with the tractor. One (1) Weldon Model 9186-1500-10 red LED light will be installed centered on the cab roof. Both of the lights will be provided on 12" brackets. The light will be activated with the ignition switch. WORK LIGHTS Two (2) Collins, Model FX -12, deck lights will be provided at the rear of the apparatus. Each light will be a spot/floodlight. Each light will have a 100 watt H-2 spot bulb and a 55 watt H-2 flld bulb. CAB SPOTLIGHTS Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The spotlights will be furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs. HAND HELD LIGHT There will be four (4) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location will be TBD. CHARGER, BASE (hand held) The apparatus manufacturer will furnish and install a Streamlight, model 45071, orange, charging base for each of the customer installed hand held lights. The number of hand held lights being installed by the customer will be four (4) lights. The charging bases will be located TBD. SIDE AND REAR VISION SYSTEM A backup camera system, model ZON323-14AV with additional camera(s) will be provided. Page 50 of 92 There will be three (3) cameras provided in the following locations: one (1) camera integrated into the passenger side cab mirror, one (1) camera integrated into the driver side cab mirror, and one (1) camera located at the rear of the truck. The camera images will be displayed in the cab on a 7" LCD color monitor with integral camera switcher. The LCD will be located in view of the driver on the overhead panel. An additional 7" LCD color monitor will be provided in the tiller cab to view only the rear camera. Components will include: Two (2) integrated cameras in the Ramco mirrors One (1) rear vision color camera kit. Two (2) 7" LCD color monitors with integrated switcher. All necessary automated control hardware and wiring AIR HORN SYSTEM Two (2) Grover air horns will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed Inside frame rails. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing. A pressure protection valve will be installed in-line to prevent the loss of air, in the air brake system. AIR HORN CONTROL The air horns will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel. The driver will have the option to control the air horns or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch located on the instrument panel. ELECTRONIC SIREN A "Code 3", model 3692, electronic siren with noise canceling microphone will be provided. Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is accessible to both the driver and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a minimum of 180 degrees. Siren will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel. The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch. SPEAKER There will be two (2) speakers, Code -3 Model PB 100C with chrome finish, recessed in the front bumper. Connection will be connected to the siren amplifier. The speaker(s) will be recessed in either side of the front bumper. MECHANICAL SIREN (Auxiliary) A Federal Q213 siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel. The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper in the center. The siren will be properly supported using the bumper framework. The mechanical siren will be actuated by a chrome push button located on the officer side of the engine tunnel and by the horn button in the steering wheel. The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horn from the horn button by means of a Page 51 of 92 selector switch located on the instrument panel. LIGHTBAR One (1) 88.00" Whelen, Model: Freedom LED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof. This lightbar will include the following: Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules. Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules. Two (2) red flashing front corner LED modules. One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module. One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module. One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar. The lens color will be clear. To meet NFPA requirements, all clear lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is applied. HEADLIGHT FLASHER The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control switch located on the cab instrument panel. The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the parking brake is set. SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING Six (6) Whelen model 60*02F*R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following positions: Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab corner - red Super LED/red lens each side. Two (2) lights, Cab sides behind rear doors - red Super LED/rd lens each side. Two (2) lights, N/A - red Super LED/red lens each side. The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel. These lights will be installed N/A. REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING Two (2) Whelen model 60*02F*R flashing "Super" LED warning lights will be located at the rear of the apparatus, required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical power requirements of NFPA. The color of these lights will be red Super LED/red lens. One (1) switch in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights. These lights will be installed with a flange. WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Hose Bed) Two (2) Whelen MCFLED2* LED warning lights will be provided at the rear of the truck, located one (1) each side. One (1) of these lights will be all red LED with red lens. One (1) of these lights will be all amber LED with amber lens. The location shall be either side at rear of tiller cab Page 52 of 92 These lights will be activated by a lighted switch on the instrument panel. LIGHT, REAR UPPER ZONE, BLOCKING There will be a pair of Whelen 6E series halogen flashing lights provided at the rear of apparatus at a level of 62.00" or higher. The lights will have amber lenses. The flash pattern will be controlled by an electronic flasher. The halogen flashing lights will be activated whenever the rear upper zone switch is on and the parking brake is set. TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL65 36.01" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep, amber LED traffic directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus. The Whelen model TACTLD 1 control head will be included with this installation. The auxiliary warning mode will be activated with the control head only. This traffic directing light will be surface mounted with a treadplate box at the rear of the apparatus as high as practical. The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel bracket centered between the driver and passenger. This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN for ALTERNATING CURRENT The following guidelines will apply to the 120/240 VAC system installation: General Any fixed line voltage power source producing alternating current (ac) line voltage will produce electric power at 60 cycles plus or minus five (5) cycles. Except where superseded by the requirements of NFPA 1901, all components, equipment and installation procedures will conform to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (herein referred to as the NEC). Line voltage electrical system equipment and materials included on the apparatus will be listed and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All products will be used only in the manner for which they have been listed. Grounding Grounding will be in accordance with Section 250-6 "Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators" of the NEC. Ungrounded systems will not be used. Only stranded or braided copper conductors will be used for grounding and bonding. An equipment grounding means will be provided in accordance with Section 250-91 (Grounding Conductor Material) of the NEC. The grounded current carrying conductor (neutral) will be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors and from the equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The neutral conductor will be colored white or gray in accordance with Section 200-6 (Means of Identifying Grounding Conductors) of the NEC. In addition to the bonding required for the low voltage return current, each body and driving or crew Page 53 of 92 compartment enclosure will be bonded to the vehicle frame by a copper conductor. This conductor will have a minimum amperage rating of 115 percent of the nameplate current rating of the power source specification label as defined in Section 310-15 (amp capacities) of the NEC. A single conductor properly sized to meet the low voltage and line voltage requirements will be permitted to be used. All power source system mechanical and electrical components will be sized to support the continuous duty nameplate rating of the power source. Operation Instructions that provide the operator with the essential power source operating instructions, including the power -up and power -down sequence, will be permanently attached to the apparatus at any point where such operations can take place. Provisions will be made for quickly and easily placing the power source into operation. The control will be marked to indicate when it is correctly positioned for power source operation. Any control device used in the drive train will be equipped with a means to prevent the unintentional movement of the control device from its set position. A power source specification label will be permanently attached to the apparatus near the operator's control station. The label will provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 19-4.10. Direct drive (PTO) and portable generator installations will comply with Article 445 (Generators) of the NEC. Overcurrent protection The conductors used in the power supply assembly between the output terminals of the power source and the main over current protection device will not exceed 144 inches. (3658 mm) in length. For fixed power supplies, all conductors in the power supply assembly will be type THHW, THW, or use stranded conductors enclosed in nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated for a minimum of 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius). For portable power supplies, conductors located between the power source and the line side of the main overcurrent protection device will be type SO or type SEO with suffix WA flexible cord rated for 600 -volts at 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius). Wiring Methods Fixed wiring systems will be limited to the following: - Metallic or nomnetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius) or - Type SO or Type SEO cord with a WA suffix, rated at 600 volts at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius) Electrical cord or conduit will not be attached to chassis suspension components, water or fuel lines, air or air brake lines, fire pump piping, hydraulic lines, exhaust system components, or low voltage wiring. In addition the wiring will be run as follows: - Separated by a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm), or properly shielded, from exhaust piping Page 54 of 92 - Separated from fuel lines by a minimum of six (6) inches (152 mm) distance Electrical cord or conduit will be supported within six (6) inches (152 mm) of any junction box and at a minimum of every 24 inches (6 10 mm) of continuous run. Supports will be made of nonmetallic materials or corrosion protected metal. All supports will be of a design that does not cut or abrade the conduit or cable and will be mechanically fastened to the vehicle. Wiring Identification All line voltage conductors located in the main panel board will be individually and permanently identified. The identification will reference the wiring schematic or indicate the final termination point. When prewiring for future power sources or devices, the unterminated ends will be labeled showing function and wire size. Wet Locations All wet location receptacle outlets and inlet devices, including those on hardwired remote power distribution boxes, will be of the grounding type provided with a wet location cover and installed in accordance with Section 210-7 "Receptacles and Cord Connections" of the NEC. All receptacles located in a wet location will be not less than 24 inches (6 10 nun) from the ground. Receptacles on off-road vehicles will be a minimum of 30 inches (762 mm) from the ground. The face of any wet location receptacle will be installed in a plane from vertical to not more than 45 degrees off vertical. No receptacle will be installed in a face up position. Dry, Locations All receptacles located in a dry location will be of the grounding type. Receptacles will be not less than 30 inches (762 mm) above the interior floor height. All receptacles will be marked with the type of line voltage (120 -volts or 240 -volts) and the current rating in amps. If the receptacles are direct current, or other than single phase, they will be so marked. Listing All receptacles and electrical inlet devices will be listed to UL 498, Standard for Safety Attaclunent Plugs and Receptacles, or other appropriate performance standards. Receptacles used for direct current voltages will be rated for the appropriate service. Electrical System Testing The wiring and associated equipment will be tested by the apparatus manufacturer or the installer of the line voltage system. The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment will be subjected to a dielectric voltage withstand test of 900 volts for one (1) minute. The test will be conducted between live parts and the neutral conductor, and between live parts and the vehicle frame with any switches in the circuit(s) closed. This test will be conducted after all body work has been completed. Electrical polarity verification will be made of all permanently wired equipment and receptacles to determine that connections have been properly made. Operational Test per Current NFPA 1901 Standards The apparatus manufacturer will perform the following operation test and ensure that the power source and any devices that are attached to the line voltage electrical system are properly connected and in working order. The test will be witnessed and the results certified by Underwriters Laboratories. Page 55 of 92 The prime mover will be started from a cold start condition and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100 percent of the nameplate rating. The power source will be operated at 100 percent of its nameplate voltage for a minimum of two (2) hours unless the system meets category certification as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard. Where the line voltage power is derived from the vehicle's low voltage system, the minimum continuous electrical load as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard will be applied to the low voltage electrical system during the operational test. GENERATOR The apparatus will be equipped with a complete electrical power system. The generator will be a Harrison Model 15.0 TGM 15.0 kW Hydraulic unit. The wiring and generator installation will conform to the present National Electrical Codes Standards of the National Fire Protection Association. The installation will be designed for continuous operation without overheating and undue stress on components. Generator Performance - Continuous Duty Rating: 15,000 watts - Nominal Volts: 120/240 - Amperage: 125 @ 120 volts, 62.5 @ 240 volts - Phase: Single -Cycles: 60 hertz - Engine Speed at Engagement: Idle - RPM range: 925 to 3,000 (hydraulic pump) Generator Dimensions - The dimensions were not available when this option was created. This option will be updated when the dimensions become available. - Weight: 455 pounds (dry) The output of the generator will be controlled by an internal hydraulic system. An electrical instrument gauge panel will be provided for the operator to monitor and control all electrical operations and output. The generator will be driven by a transmission power take off unit, through a hydraulic pump and motor. The generator will include an electrical control inside the cab. The hydraulic engagement supply will be operational at any time (no interlocks). An electric/hydraulic valve will supply hydraulic fluid to the clutch engagement unit provided on the chassis PTO drive. Generator Instruments and Controls To properly monitor the generator performance a digital meter panel will be furnished and mounted next to the Page 56 of 92 circuit breaker panel. The meter will indicate the following items: - Voltage - Amperage for both lines - Frequency - Generator run hours - Over current indication - Over temperature indication - "Power On" indication - Two (2) fuse holders with two (2) amp fuses (for indicator light protection) The meter and indicators will be installed near eye level in the compartment. Instruments will be flush mounted in an appropriate sized weatherproof electrical enclosure. All instruments used will be accurate within +/- two (2) percent. Generator Wirina: The system will be installed by highly qualified electrical technicians to assure the required level of safety and protection to the fire apparatus operators. The wiring, electrical fixtures and components will be to the highest industry quality standards available on the domestic market. The equipment will be the type as designed for mobile type installations subject to vibration, moisture and severe continuous usage. The following electrical components will be the minimum acceptable quality standards for this apparatus: Wiring_ All electrical wiring will be fine stranded copper type. The wire will be sized to the load and circuit breaker rating; ten (10) gauge on 30 amp circuits, 12 gauge on 20 amp circuits and 14 gauge on 15 amp circuits. The cable will be run in corner areas and extruded aluminum pathways built into the body for easy access. Load Center: The main load center will be a Cutler Hammer with circuit breakers rated to load demand. Circuit Breakers: Individual breakers will be provided for all on-line equipment to isolate a tripped breaker from affecting any other on-line equipment. GENERATOR LOCATION The generator will be mounted in the area above the goose neck of the tiller trailer. The flooring in this area will be either reinforced or constructed, in such a manner, that it will handle the additional weight of the generator. GENERATOR COVER An aluminum treadplate surround will be provide to conceal the generator. Adequate louvers or knock -outs will be provided for cooling the generator. GENERATOR START Page 57 of 92 A switch will be located on the cab instrument panel to engage the generator. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL The circuit breaker panel will be located to be determined. 120 VOLT LIGHTING The apparatus will be equipped with a telescoping bottom raise Fire Research Model FC530-S75 quartz tube floodlight. The telescoping pole will be as long as is practical to fit in the location it is mounted. The light fixture will be a single 750 watt, 120 volt Focus light that draws 6.3 amps. The lamp head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down. All wiring used up to the junction box will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cable that is properly supported and protected from damage. A total of Two (2) will be provided One each side back of cab use 4" off set brackets for these lights. 120 VOLT LIGHTING The apparatus will be equipped with a top mount non -telescoping Fire Research Model FC570 with a Focus light head, model S75 quartz tube flood light. Each light head will be 120 volt, 750 watts, with a 6.3 amp draw and have an output of 21,000 lumens. The light head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down. All wiring to the circuit breaker box will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cord that is properly supported and protected from damage. A total of Four (4) will be provided abhove D-3 and D-6 and above P-3 and P-6. REMOTE SWITCH (Quartz Light) A remote on/off actuation switch, with a 12VDC, green indicator light, will be provided to actuate a 120/240 volt solenoid switch for each quartz light. The two (2) switches will be located driver side and officer side switch panels. The switches will control the lights On Overhead. COMMAND LIGHT A Command Light Knight 2, Model KL475, with backlight and "auto park" will be provided. The light will be provided with six (6) 750 watt 230 volt lamps. The light will be actuated by 12 volts. An indicator light will be provided in the cab for warning when the light is not in the nested position. At the top of the light tower will be a blue strobe light. The dimensions of the light in the nested position will be 47.00" long x 23.50" wide x 11.25" high. The light will extend 87.50" from the bottom surface to the top of the light. The weight of the light tower will be approximately 145 pounds. The handheld controller with 12' of cord will be installed TBD. Page 58 of 92 A total of N/A will be provided. The light tower will be installed TBD. 120 VOLT LIGHTING, TIP OF LADDER Two (2), Kwik -Raze 736, Magnafire 3000, 750 watt, 120 volt light(s), demountable will be provided at the tip of the ladder. The light(s) will be located on the driver and passenger side. Light(s) will be 120 volts. Light(s) will be switched at the lighthead and turntable. ELECTRIC CORD REEL Furnished with the 120 volt AC electrical system will be a Hannay, series 1600, cord reel. The reel will be provided with a 12 -volt electric rewind switch, that is guarded to prevent accidental operation and labeled for its intended use. The switch will be protected with a fuse and installed at a height not to exceed 72 inches above the operators standing position. The exterior finish of the reel(s) will be painted #269 gray from the reel manufacturer.. A Nylatron guide to be provided to aid in the payout and loading of the reel. A ball stop will'be provided to prevent the cord from being wound on the reel. A label will be provided in a readily visible location adjacent to the reel. The label will indicate current rating, current type, phase, voltage and total cable length. A total of two (2) cord reels will be provided above gooseneck in front of body. The cord reel will be configured with three (3) conductors. CORD Provided for electric distribution will be two (2) lengths, one for each reel, of 200 feet of yellow 10/3 electrical cord, weather resistant 105 degree C to -50 degree C, 600 volt jacketed SOOW cord. A Hubbell L5-20, 20 ainp, 120 volt, twist lock connector body will be installed on the end of the cord. PORTABLE JUNCTION BOX There will be four (4) 120 vac 20 amp twist lock receptacles provided in a portable junction box. The junction box will be of weatherproof construction and have flip up lids lined with soft neoprene rubber at each outlet opening. A Hubbell L5-20, 20 amp, 120 volt, twist lock connector body. A total of two (2) will be provided. REEL ENCLOSURE An aluminum treadplate enclosure will be installed over the reel. The enclosure will be provided with a stainless steel hinge that will allow the cover to be opened. A captive roller assembly will be provided through the side sheet to assist with the pay out of the cord. A ball stop will be provided on the cord to stop the cord at the roller assembly Page 59 of 92 A total of two (2) will be installed On gooseneck. JUNCTION BOX HOLDER There will be an aluminum junction box holder installed adjacent to the cord reel. A total of two (2) will be installed. with Electric reel. 20 AMP RECEPTACLE Wired to the power supply will be two (2) receptacles that are a 120 volt 20 amp three wire twist -lock NEMA L5-20 type with weather resisting cover located Fenderwell area 1 each side. KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE two (2) shoreline receptacles will be provided to operate the dedicated 120 -volt circuits on the truck without the use of the generator. The shoreline receptacle (s), model #091-159-30-120, will be provided with a 120 volt, 30 amp, 3 pin Kussmaul Super auto eject plug with a red weatherproof cover. The cover is spring loaded to close, preventing water from entering when the shoreline is not connected. The unit is completely sealed to prevent road dirt contamination. A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This instantaneously drives the plug from the receptacle. A novel plug detector closes and opens the 120 volt A.C. circuit after the mating connector is inserted and before the connector is ejected.. The shoreline will be connected to Batt Charger and Eng Heater. A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment. The shoreline receptacle will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab. FOUR (4) -SECTION 100 FOOT TRACTOR -DRAWN AERIAL LADDER CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS The ladder will be constructed to meet all of the requirements as described in the current NFPA 1901 standards. The aerial device will be a true ladder type device; therefore ladders attached to booms will not be considered. These capabilities will be established in an unsupported configuration. All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are made of a ductile material will have a design stress of not more than 50% of the minimum yield strength of the material based on the combination of the live load and the dead load. This 2:1 structural safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard. All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are made of non -ductile material will have a design stress of not more than 20% of the minimum ultimate strength of the material, based on the combination of the rated capacity and the dead load. This 5:1 safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard. Page 60 of 92 Wire ropes and attaching systems used to extend and retract the fly sections will have a 5:1 safety factor based on the ultimate strength under all operating conditions. The factor of safety for the wire rope will remain above 2:1 during any extension or retraction stall. The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the diameter of the sheave used will be 1:12. Wire ropes will be constructed of seven (7) strands over an inner wire core for increased flexibility. The wire rope will be galvanized to reduce corrosion. The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one-half times its rated tip load capacity (live load) in every position in which the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a firm level surface. The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one-third times its rated tip load capacity (live load) in every position the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a slope of five degrees downward in the direction most likely to cause overturning. With the aerial device out of the cradle and in the fully extended position at zero degrees elevation, a test load will be applied in a horizontal direction normal to the centerline of the ladder. The turntable will not rotate and the ladder will not deflect beyond what the product specification allows. All welding of aerial components, including the aerial ladder sections, turntable, pedestal, and outriggers, will be in compliance with the American Welding Society standards. All welding personnel will be certified, as qualified under AWS welding codes. All material and welds will have a structural safety factor of 2:1. This will be derived from taking into account structure weight, payload, wind load, ice load, nozzle reactions, and dynamics. The aerial device will be capable of operating with the maximum rated tip load in either of the two (2) following conditions: - Conditions of high wind up to 50 mph - Conditions of icing, up to a coating of .25" over the entire aerial structure All of the design criteria must be supported by the following test data: (no exception) - Strain gage testing of the complete aerial device - Analysis of deflection data taken while the aerial device was under test load The following standards for materials are to be used in the design of the aerial device: - Materials are to be certified by the mill that manufactured the material - Materials that are certified or recertified by vendors other than the mill will not be acceptable - Material testing that is performed after the mill test will be for verification only and not with the intent of changing the classification - All welded structural components for the ladder will be traceable to their mill lots. LADDER CONSTRUCTION The ladder is comprised of four sections and will extend to a nominal height of 100 feet above the ground at 75 degrees. Page 61 of 92 The ladder will have the capability to support a minimum of 500 pounds at the tip in the unsupported configuration, based upon 360 degree rotation, up to full extension and from -5 degrees to +75 degrees. The ladder will be constructed of high strength low alloy steel, minimum 70,000 pounds per square inch yield, with full traceability on all structural members. Each section will be trussed diagonally, vertically and horizontally using welded steel tubing. All critical points are reinforced for extra rigidity and to provide a high strength -to -weight ratio. All ladder rungs are round and welded to each section utilizing "K" bracing for torsional rigidity. The inside width dimensions of the ladder will be: - Base Section 39.00" - Lower Mid Section 32.25" - Upper Mid Section 26.62" - Fly Section 21.38" The height of the handrails above the centerline of the rungs will be: - Base Section 26.75" - Lower Mid Section 22.87" - Upper Mid Section 20.25" - Fly Section 17.50" The ladder will be designed to provide continuous egress for firefighters and civilians from an elevated position to the ground. The end of the fly section will be constructed in a manner that aids personnel in climbing off the ladder. The egress section will be designed to maintain the rated load of the aerial device. It will be bolted on for easy replacement. Each rung will be covered with a secure, heavy-duty, fiberglass pultrusion that incorporates an aggressive, no - slip coating. The rung covers will be glued to each rung, and will be easily replaceable should the rung cover become damaged. Each rung cover edge will have 2.00" of photo -luminescent, aggressive, no -slip coating to assist in providing a light source for each rung during low light conditions. The photo -luminescent coating will remain visible for up to 20 hours after exposure to light. The use of electrically powered lighting or tape to light the rungs will not be allowed. (no exception) Page 62 of 92 Under no circumstances will the rung covers be fastened to the rungs using screws or rivets. (no exception) The rung covers will have a 10 -year, limited warranty. TURNTABLE The upper turntable assembly will connect the aerial ladder to the turntable bearing. The steel structure will have a mounting position for the aerial elevation cylinders, ladder connecting pins, and upper turntable operator's position. The turntable platform will be rectangular -shaped and approximately 96.00" wide by 72.00" long. The turntable will be a 1.00" thick steel deck, coated with an non-skid, chemical resistant material in the walking areas. The stepping surfaces will meet the skid -resistance requirements of the current NFPA 1901 standard. The turntable is lighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the aerial master switch. The turntable handrails will be a minimum 42.00" high and will not increase the overall travel height of the vehicle. The handrails will be constructed from 1.25" diameter extruded 6063-T6 aluminum with a slip resistant knurled surface. The handrails will be anodized to resist corrosion. ELEVATION SYSTEM Two (2) double acting lift cylinders will be utilized to provide smooth precise elevation from 5 degrees below horizontal to 75 degrees above horizontal. The lift cylinders will have a 6.00" internal diameter (bore), a .375" wall thickness, a 4.50" diameter cylinder rod and a 33.38" stroke. The lift cylinders will be equipped with integral holding valves located on the cylinder to prevent the unit from falling should the charged lines be severed at any point within the hydraulic system. (no exception) They also will have spherical bushings at each end to reduce pin wear. Both raising and lowering functions are influenced by flow compensation which maintains ladder tip speed within approximately 10% regardless of load, angle or extension. Ladder tip speed is automatically decelerated at angles above 60 degrees reducing "tip -lash". The pivot pins will be stainless steel and 2.25" in diameter. Each elevation pin will be stainless steel with a greaseless ladder pivot pin. EXTENSION/RETRACTION SYSTEM A full hydraulic powered extension and retraction system will be provided using two (2) hydraulic cylinders and wire ropes. Each set is capable of operating the ladder in the event of a failure to the other. The extension cylinder will have a 3.00" internal diameter (bore), 1.75" diameter rod and a 134.00" stroke. Extension and retraction will be internally limited within the cylinders, eliminating excess strain on wire ropes, sheaves and the ladder structure. Page 63 of 92 Each of the cylinders, wire ropes and sheave assemblies will be completely independent of the other, so as to provide a safety factor wherein a failure of one assembly will not affect the function and operation of the other. The extension cylinders are equipped with counter balance valves to synchronize the cylinders for smoother operation and prevent the unit from retracting should the charged lines be severed at any point within the hydraulic system. The cylinders will also have internal deceleration valves, to cushion the movement of the cylinder when approaching full extension or retraction. All extension/retraction pins will have a corrosion - preventative, QPQ black finish. The reeling of the wire rope will be such as to provide synchronized, simultaneous movement of all sections to full extension. The extension/retraction wire ropes will be 7 -flex galvanized with stainless steel threaded ends, and will possess the following characteristics: - Lower Mid Section .50 diameter, 26,200# breaking strength - Upper Mid Section .38" diameter, 14,880# breaking strength - Fly Section .31" diameter, 10,380# breaking strength Wear pads made of polymer material will be used between the telescoping sections for maximum weight distribution, strength and smoothness of operation. Adjustment screws are provided on the wear pads to permit proper side alignment. All sheaves will be plastic and greaseless and all sheave pins and pivot pins will be stainless steel. (no exception) ROTATION SYSTEM A 46.00" diameter, external tooth, monorace, slewing ring bearing will be used for the rotation system. The gear teeth will be a stub tooth form. The bearing race will have sealed 1.00" ball bearings. The bearing will provide 360 degree continuous rotation. The turntable will be bolted to the bearing using 36 SAE Grade 8,.875" diameter bolts. To secure the bearing to the base support 36 Grade 8_875" diameter bolts will be used. The turntable base and the torque box bearing plate will be machined to fit the bearing thereby providing even distribution of forces. A hydraulically driven, planetary gear box with a drive speed reducer will be used to provide infinite and minute rotation control throughout the entire rotational travel. The gearbox will have a torque rating of 130,000 pounds per square inch. A spring applied, hydraulically released disc type swing brake will be furnished to provide positive braking of the turntable assembly. Page 64 of 92 Provisions will be made for auxiliary operation of the system in case of prime mover failure. The hydraulic system is equipped with pressure relief valves which will limit the rotational torque to a non- destructive power. ROTATION INTERLOCK A permanently installed prevention mechanism will be provided as part of the rotation system to prevent the rotation of the aerial device to the side in which the stabilizers have not been fully deployed or are shortjacked. The mechanism will allow full and unrestricted use of the aerial in the 180 degree area on the side(s) where the stabilizers have been fully deployed. The system will also have a manual override to comply with NFPA 1901. This will consist of a switch located in the lower control station so that activation will require two (2) persons (one at an aerial device control location and one at the lower control station). SYSTEMS THAT PERMIT THE AERIAL TO ROTATE TO THE "SHORT JACK" SIDE WITHOUT AUTOMATICALLY STOPPING THE ROTATION AND/OR WITHOUT ACTUATION OF THE "MANUAL OVERRIDE" SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SYSTEMS THAT ONLY INCLUDE AN ALARM ARE NOT CONSIDERED AN INTERLOCK AND SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. LOAD CAPACITIES The following load capacities will be established with the stabilizers at full horizontal extension and placed in the down position to level the truck and to relieve the weight from the tires and axles. Capacities will be based upon full extension and 360 degree rotation. A load chart, visible at the operator's station, will be provided. The load chart will show the recommended safe load at any condition of the aerial device's elevation and extension. (no exception) 50 MPH WIND CONDITIONS/WATERWAY DRY Degrees of Elevation -5 to 9 10 to 19 20 to 29 30 to 39 40 to 49 50 to 59 60 to 69 70 to 75 Egress 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 Fly - - - - - 250 500 750 Upper Mid - - - 250 250 500 1000 1000 Lower Mid - - 250 250 500 750 1000 1000 Base - 250 250 500 750 1000 1000 1000 50 MPH WIND CONDITIONS/WATERWAY CHARGED Degrees of Elevation -5 to 9 10 to 19 20 to 29 30 to 39 40 to 49 50 to 59 60 to 69 70 to 75 Egress 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 Fly - - - - - 250 500 750 Upper Mid - - - - 250 500 750 1000 Lower Mid - - - 250 500 750 1000 1000 Page 65 of 92 Base - - 250 500 750 1000 1000 1000 Reduced loads at the tip can be redistributed in 250 lb. increments to the fly, mid, or base sections as needed. BOOM SUPPORT A heavy-duty boom support will be provided for support of the ladder in the travel position. On the base section of the ladder, a stainless steel scuffplate will be provided where the ladder comes into contact with the boom support. In the stowed position, the ladder tip will be not less than 11.00" below horizontal for unsurpassed visibility and safety while maneuvering the apparatus. FOLDING STEPS One (1) set of folding steps will be provided at the tip of the ladder. An additional set of folding steps will be provided at the base of the fly section. The steps will be bright finished, non-skid luminescent folding type. The luminescent coating is rechargeable from any light source and can hold a charge for up to 24 hours. EXTENSION INDICATOR Extension markings and corresponding numerical indicators will be provided along each inside and outside top rail of the base section of the aerial every ten (10) feet. They will indicate various positions of extension up to full. Markings and indicators will be clearly visible to the console operator. To aid in visibility during hours of darkness, the markings and numerical indicators will be of a red reflective material. SPOTLIGHTS Four (4) Unity AG -S-4007 12 volt spot/flood lights will be furnished. The two (2) "tracking lights" will be mounted on the base section of the ladder, one (1) on each side. The two (2) "tip lights" will be mounted on the tip of the ladder, one (1) on each side. The lights will be mounted below the handrail height so as not to increase the overall height of the unit. An individual master switch with appropriate identification labels will be provided for the "tracking lights" and "tip lights" in addition to the on/off switch located on the light itself. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that the power and signal protection and control compartments will contain circuit protection devices and power control devices. The power and signal protection and control components will be protected against corrosion, excessive heat, excessive vibration, physical damage, and water spray. The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following: - All of the serviceable components will be readily accessible. - Circuit protection devices will be utilized to protect each circuit - General protection circuit breakers will be Type -I automatic reset (continuously resetting) or Type -II (manual resetting) and conform to SAE requirements. When required, automotive type fuses conforming to SAE requirements will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. - Power control relays and solenoids, when utilized, will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125% of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected. Page 66 of 92 The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following: - Toggle switches will be utilized that are certified for the outside conditions that fire apparatus experience. - All wiring will be protected through conduit or loom. - All wiring harnesses will be properly supported to eliminate harness damage through rubbing. - All connectors utilized in the system will be of a waterproof design. - Two (2) inductive proximity switchs and an illumination light will be incorporated into the boom support. - The aerial master and aerial PTO can be engaged after the water pump has been engaged without having to bring the RPM back to idle. - Standard cabling to the tip of the aerial will consist of one (1) 16/20 cable and one (1) 12/8 cable. DRIVER SIDE TORQUE BOX POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL A fuse and relay panel, located in the passenger side gooseneck area, will include the following: - NEMA 4x rated weatherproof enclosure - Relays, fuses, and circuit breakers for aerial and stabilizer interlocks and control switches TURNTABLE LIGHTING The turntable will be lighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the aerial master switch. A foot switch will be located at the turntable console to allow hydraulic flow to the aerial device. The foot switch will be protected by a cover to prevent accidental activation. Activation of the foot switch is necessary for aerial device operation. TURNTABLE CONSOLE The following switches and indicator lights will be standard on the turntable console: - High idle on/off switch - Tip/Tracking light switch - Indicator and alarm test switch - Emergency hydraulic power switch - STABILIZERS NOT FULLY EXTENDED amber indicator light - Rung alignment green indicator light The turntable console will be lighted for nighttime operation with one (1) work light activated by the aerial master switch. A fuse panel will be located in the turntable console. TURNTABLE OVERRIDE CONTROLS Page 67 of 92 The aerial manual override controls will be located in the turntable control console MASTER OVERRIDE CONTROLS An emergency power switch will be located at the rear of the apparatus. The switch will activate the emergency power unit and allow control of the aerial or stabilizers based on the direction the switch is toggled. A work light will be provided to illuminate the master override controls when the battery switch is active and the master override door is open. BOOM SUPPORT Two (2) Turck inductive proximity switchs will be provided on the boom support to detect if the aerial device is fully stowed within the boom support. STABILIZER INDICATOR A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" indicator will be provided in the driver's compartment. It will illuminate automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed, to prevent damage to the apparatus if moved. The stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move" indicator light, which will flash whenever the apparatus parking brake is not fully engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed. CRADLE INTERLOCK SYSTEM A cradle interlock system will be provided to prevent the lifting of the aerial from the nested position until the operator has positioned all the stabilizers in a load supporting configuration. A switch will be installed at the cradle to prevent operation of the stabilizers once the aerial has been elevated from the nested position. STABILIZER ALARM An electronic warning device will be provided at each stabilizer to warn personnel that the stabilizers are being deployed. Each alarm will produce a fast pulsing 90 DBA signal and will cancel only when the stabilizer is put into a load bearing configuration. STABILIZER SCENE LIGHTS A 4.00" clear floodlight will be provided on each stabilizer to illuminate the surrounding area. The light will be actuated by the aerial master switch. CONTROL STATION There will be a turntable control station located on the right hand side of the turntable so the operator will be able to easily observe the ladder tip while operating the controls. The controls will permit the operator to regulate the speed of the aerial functions within safe limits (as determined by the manufacturer and NFPA standards). The controls will be clearly marked and lighted for nighttime operation. A hinged aluminum cover will be provided. The momentary foot switch located at the turntable control station will activate the aerial function controls. They are capable of being operated independently or simultaneously. The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified, illuminated, and conveniently located for ease of operation and viewing: - Elevation, extension/retraction, and rotation controls - High idle switch - Rung alignment indicator light - Tip/Tracking lights Page 68 of 92 - Hydraulic system pressure gauge - Indicator/Alarm test switch - EPU switch - Operator's load chart - Stabilizer Not Fully Extended indicator light - Monitor controls - Aerial waterway flow meter There will also be a minimum of two (2) 12 -volt work lights installed on the turntable to illuminate the surrounding area for nighttime operation. The work lights will be activated by the aerial master switch. STABILIZER CONTROL STATION There will be an easily accessible control station located at both the driver and passenger side of the apparatus. The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified and conveniently located for ease of operation and viewing at each control station. - Stabilizer controls for driver and passenger side - Stabilizer Firm On Ground indicator lights - Stabilizer Fully Extended indicator lights - Inclinometer for grade and slope - Stabilizer EPU switch - High Idle switch STABILIZERS The vehicle will come equipped with a stabilization system consisting of two (2) hydraulically operated out and down style stabilizers. This system will meet or exceed all requirements of the NFPA specifications related to stabilization and setup on sloped surfaces. The stabilizer/leveling jacks will have a maximum spread of 17' measured from the centerline of the jack footpads when the beams are fully extended. The beams will be 6.81" wide x 8.88" high with 3/4" thick top and bottom plates and 1/2" thick sides of 100,000 -PSI minimum yield strength steel. The cylinders will have pilot - operated check valves with thermal relief designed to insure that the beams will not drift out of the stowed position during travel. Wear pads will guide the stabilizers. The horizontal extension cylinders will be totally enclosed within the beams and will incorporate telescoping hydraulic tubing to supply the jack cylinder hydraulic power. Stabilizer hydraulic hoses will remain stationary during operation of the stabilizers to prevent hose wear and potential failure. The cylinders will be equipped with decelerators to reduce the speed of extension and retraction when the beams are near the fully retracted and extended positions. The stabilizer extension hydraulic cylinders will have the following dimensions: 2.25" bore, 1.38" rod, and 57.25" stroke. Page 69 of 92 The vertical jack cylinders will be capable of 12.00" ground penetration. The cylinders will be supplied with pilot operated check valves on each jack cylinder to hold the cylinder in the stowed or working position, should a charged line be severed at any point in the hydraulic system. For safety, the integral holding valves will be located in the cylinder base end, NOT in the transfer tube. Vertical jack cylinder rods will be fully enclosed by a telescoping inner box to protect the cylinder rods from damage. The stabilizer jack hydraulic cylinders will have the following dimensions: 4.50" bore, 3.00" rod, and 28.88" stroke. Each stabilizer jack will have a polished stainless steel shield. The stainless steel shield will be a maximum of 14.00" wide so as to allow the extension of the stabilizer between parked cars or other obstacles. This plate will serve as a protective guard and a mounting surface for warning lights. The top, forward, and rear edges will be flanged back 90 degrees for added strength. Each stabilizer will be supplied with a red LED warning light on each side of the beam. A reflective stripe will be provided on the horizontal and vertical beams of each stabilizer. A 4.00" diameter clear work light will be provided to illuminate the stabilizer and the ground. Lighting will automatically activate with the aerial master switch. STABILIZER PADS The stabilizer footpad will be 12.00" in diameter. The footpad will be attached to the jack cylinder rod by means of a machined ball at the end of the jack cylinder rod which mates to a socket machined into the footpad. The footpad will have the ability to pivot 20 degrees from horizontal in any direction to allow setup on uneven terrain. AUXILIARY STABILIZER PADS An auxiliary ground pad will be supplied for each stabilizer to provide additional load distribution on soft surfaces. The pads will be 24.00" square and made from a lightweight composite material. The ground pressure will not exceed 75 pounds per square inch when the ground pads are used and the apparatus is fully loaded and the aerial device is carrying its rated capacity in any position. STABILIZER CONTROLS An electrically controlled hydraulic valve will power stabilizer movement. The valve can also be manually controlled in the event of electrical malfunction. Hydraulic power override controls will be incorporated into the valve. The manual override mechanism will be completely sealed within the valve assembly to prevent any possibility of corrosion. The stabilizer controls will be located to provide the operator with a full view of each stabilizer being positioned. Each stabilizer control panel will include the following: -In/out stabilizer beam control toggle switch -Up/down stabilizer jack control toggle switch -Emergency hydraulic power unit (EPU) control toggle switch -High idle control toggle switch -Stabilizer fully extended LED indicator lights -Stabilizer planted LED indicator lights As a safety device, an electrically actuated diverter valve will be provided. The hydraulic power will be diverted to the aerial ladder controls automatically the instant all stabilizer jacks are firmly planted on the ground. Once the aerial ladder is raised from the bedded position, the stabilizer hydraulic power is cut off so the stabilizers will not accidentally be moved while the aerial is being operated. To aid in leveling the unit, two bubble type angle indicators will be located near the stabilizer controls. One indicator will show the angle of the truck from the front to rear and the other will show the side to side angle of the truck. The indicators will be color coded green to show when the truck has been properly leveled allowing the aerial device to be operated at full capacity. Page 70 of 92 A stabilizer deployment audible warning alarm will be provided at each side of the body, activated by the stabilizer movement. A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" indicator light will be provided in the cab within view of the driver. It will illuminate automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed to prevent damage to the vehicle if it is moved. The stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move Truck" indicator light. This light will flash whenever the apparatus parking brake is not engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed. STABILIZER PINS The stabilizer jacks will have holes for the stabilizer pins. STAINLESS STEEL DOORS, STABILIZER CONTROL BOX Vertically hinged stainless steel doors will be provided over each stabilizer control box. The doors will be hinged inboard. LIGHTING ON AERIAL LADDER Blue LED rope lighting will be provided on both sides of the aerial ladder base, upper and lower mid, and fly sections. The lighting will be located adjacent to the ladder rungs along the lower rail of the ladder sections and will run the length of the ladder section. The lighting will be controlled with a switch at the turntable control console. AERIAL LOCATOR LIGHT, STROBE A light will be installed at the aerial tip for the purpose of locating the aerial device while in operation. The light will be a Whelen 800D strobe. The light will be activated when the aerial device is lifted from the cradle. The color of the locator light will be blue. STABILIZER WARNING LIGHTS Two (2) Whelen model 60*02F*R flashing Super LED warning light will be mounted on the stabilizer cover panel, one (1) for each panel. These lights will be controlled by the NFPA side lower zone switch. The color of these lights will be red Super LED/red lens each side. These lights will be with a flange. STABILIZER BEAM WARNING LIGHTS Two (2) 4.00" diameter red LED flashing lights will be mounted on each stabilizer, one (1) facing forward and one (1) facing rearward. The lights will be Grote Supernova 40 series LED lights. The lights will be recessed in the horizontal beam of the stabilizer. These warning lights will be activated with the aerial master switch. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM All hose assemblies will be assembled and crimped by the hose manufactures certified technician. An assembly cell will be located on the premises where the technician can perform audits of the final aerial assembly for proper fitting torque and hose routing. All manufacturing employees responsible for the installation of hydraulic components will be properly trained. Training will include: proper handling, installation, torque requirements, cleanliness and quality control procedures for hydraulic components. Hoses used in the aerial hydraulic system will be of a premium quality hose with a high abrasion resistant cover. All pressure hoses will have a working pressure of 4000 psi and a burst pressure rating of 16,000 psi. Page 71 of 92 The hydraulic oil will be a premium Multi -Vis product having a leading edge additive package, provide oxidation stability, be extremely shear stable and maximum anti -wear properties. All oil delivered to the manufacturing site will have a minimum ISO cleanliness level of 18/15/13. Each aerial will be evaluated as to the region and climate where it will be used to determine the optimum viscosity and proper oil grade. Oil viscosity will be based on an optimum range of 80 to 1000 SUS during normal aerial use. Before shipment of the unit, an oil sample will be taken and analyzed to confirm the oil is within the allowable ISO grade tolerance. The aerial hydraulic system will have a minimum oil cleanliness level of ISO 18/15/13 based on the ISO 4406:1999 cleanliness standard. Each customer will receive a certificate of actual cleanliness test results and an explanation of the rating system. Each aerial will include an oil sample port, identified with a yellow dust cap and a label, for subsequent customer testing. Ball valves will be provided in the hydraulic suction and return lines to permit component servicing without draining the oil reservoir. The system hydraulic pressure will be displayed on a 2.5" liquid filled gauge, located on the control console. The hydraulic system will be additionally protected from excessive pressure by a secondary pressure relief valve set at 3,150 psi. In the event the main hydraulic pump compensator malfunctions, the secondary relief will prevent system damage. HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS All cylinders used on the aerial device will be produced by a manufacturer that specializes in the manufacture of hydraulic cylinders. Each cylinder will include integral safety holding cartridges. Each cylinder will be designed to a minimum safety factor of 4:1 to failure. All safety holding cartridges will be installed at the cylinder manufacturer, in a controlled clean environment to avoid possible contamination and or failure. HYDRAULIC PUMP The hydraulic system will be supplied by a 4.6 cubic inch variable volume, load and pressure compensating piston pump. The pump will be rated at a minimum of 5,365 psi peak pressure and 2,600 rpm. The pump will meet the demands of all three simultaneous aerial functions. The pump will provide proper flow for single aerial function with the engine at idle speed. A switch will be provided on the control console to increase the engine speed for multiple function operation. EMERGENCY PUMP The aerial will be equipped with an emergency hydraulic pump, electrically driven from the truck batteries. The pump will be capable of running for 30 minutes for limited aerial functions to stow the unit in case of a main pump or truck system failure. A momentary switch will be located at the stabilizer and aerial control locations to activate the emergency pump. AERIAL CONTROL VALVE The aerial hydraulic control valve will be designed with special spool flows, limiting the oil flow for the Page 72 of 92 designed function speed. The valve will be manually controlled and be located in the control console with the handles protruding through the operating surface for operation. The activation handles will be spaced a minimum of 3.5" for ease of operation. The valve spools will be designed to bleed off downstream pressure, in the neutral position and allow proper seating of any cylinder holding cartridge. OIL RESERVOIR The oil reservoir will have a minimum capacity of 40 gallons. The oil fill location will be easily accessible and be labeled "Hydraulic Oil Only" and also indicate the grade of oil that is installed in the reservoir. The fill cap will have a 40 micron filter to provide protection from contamination. A drain hose will be included and will terminate with a quarter turn ball valve. Two suction ports will be provided, one for the main hydraulic pump and one for the emergency pump. The main suction will be slightly elevated off the bottom of the reservoir and include a 100 mesh suction strainer. The emergency suction port will be closer to the bottom of the reservoir to provide some reserve oil for emergency operation. A six (6) disc type magnetic drain will also be provided to collect any ferrous contaminants. A combination sight glass and thermometer will be mounted to the reservoir in an easily viewable location. HIGH PRESSURE FILTER The pressure filter will be rated for 6,000 psi working pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity A 90 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal system operating temperatures. The 5Q filter element will be constructed of a micro glass medium, which has the highest capture efficiency, dirt holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and synthetic. The nominal rating will be 5 micron and have an efficiency rating of 99.3 % for 5 micron sized particles. The element will have a dirt holding capacity of not less than 35 grams. RETURN FILTER The return filter will be rated for 150 psi working pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity. A 25 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal system operating temperatures. The lOQ filter element will be constructed of a micro glass medium, which has the highest capture efficiency, dirt holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and synthetic. The nominal rating will be 10 microns and have an efficiency rating of 99.5% for 10 micron sized particles. The element will have a dirt holding capacity of not less than 84.7 grams. HYDRAULIC SWIVEL The aerial ladder will be equipped with a high pressure hydraulic swivel which will connect the hydraulic lines from the hydraulic pump and reservoir, through the rotation point, to the aerial control bank. The hydraulic swivel will allow for 360 -degree continuous rotation of the aerial. ELECTRIC SWIVEL The ladder will be equipped with an electric swivel to allow 360 -degree rotation of the aerial while maintaining connections in all electrical circuits through the rotation point. A minimum of 32 collector rings that are capable of supplying 30 -amp continuous service will be provided. All collector rungs will be enclosed and protected against condensation and corrosion. AERIAL STRUCTURAL WARRANTY Limited Warranty Page 73 of 92 Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur of the expiration of 20 years or 100,000 miles of use, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that each new aerial device of its manufacture which is installed on its Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will be free of defects in design and workmanship. This warranty will apply only to the torque box, turntable, aerial sections and other structural components of the aerial device, as identified in the Pierce specifications for the aerial device. This warranty will be void if, or to the extent that the aerial device is not maintained in strict compliance with NFPA Standard 1914 in effect at time of sale, including such periodic inspections and testing by qualified third parties as are required by that Standard as it may be in effect from time to time. Proof of such compliance will accompany any claims under this warranty. Third party testing agencies known to Pierce to be qualified for such purposes may be obtained from the Pierce Customer Service Department. This limited warranty will apply only if the aerial device is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the aerial device or vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the aerial device or vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. HYDRAULIC PLUMBING COMPONENTS WARRANTY All hydraulic plumbing component suppliers will warrant the hose, adaptors, and fittings from component failure for a period of five (5) years. The supplier's obligation under this warranty will be limited to the replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer understands that the seller will not be liable for any other costs or damages. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER WARRANTY Each hydraulic cylinder will have a structural warranty of not less than five (5) years and a seal warranty of not less than two and one-half (2.5) years. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS WARRANTY All hydraulic system component suppliers will warrant all Motion and Control Group components for a period of five (5) years. This warranty will cover the valves, pumps, and hydraulic motors. Each component supplier's obligation under this warranty will be limited to the replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer understands that the seller will not be liable for any other costs or damages. A copy of the five (5) year warranty will be included with the bid. 120 -VOLT RECEPTACLE AT TIP A 120 -volt, 20 amp, three (3) -prong twist lock receptacle, with weatherproof cover will be provided at the tip of the aerial device. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM An Atkinson communication system will be furnished between the aerial tip and the turntable operator's position. The communication system will be a two (2) -way system with the communication speaker at the tip requiring no operator attention to transmit or receive. The transmitting and receiving volume controls will be located at the turntable operator's position. REMOTE AERIAL CONTROL A remote control will be provided whereby all ladder movements can be controlled at the ladder tip, in addition to the control console. The three (3) ladder functions (extension, rotation, elevation) will be controlled individually by means of spring loaded, return to center 12 -volt proportional controls. Page 74 of 92 A momentary switch at the turntable control station will activate the controls at the ladder tip. The remote control aerial speed will be set in accordance with the current NFPA 1901 standards RESCUE LIFTING SYSTEM A rescue lifting attachment will be provided. The lifting attachment brackets will mount to the front of the aerial egress using two (2) easily removable mounting brackets. The rescue lifting system will consist of a pair of nylatron pulleys mounted to a stainless steel shaft. The pulleys will be adjustable from side to side and will have a total lifting capacity of 500 pounds, regardless of whether one (1) or both pulleys are being utilized. SPECIAL HEIGHT BOOM SUPPORT A special height boom support will be provided to raise the aerial device to clear the compartment above the body. AXE MOUNTING BRACKETS Brackets will be provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for mounting a fire axe being supplied by the purchaser. The mounting plates for this installation will be "D/A" finished aluminum. PIKE POLE MOUNTING BRACKETS will be "D/A" finished and provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for pike pole mounting. The bracket will be sized to hold a AIR HORN CONTROL AT AERIAL TURNTABLE A push button control for the air horns will be provided at the aerial turntable. Collector ring space will be available for this option to be utilized. LIFTING EYE - ROPE RESCUE ATTACHMENT Two (2) eyes will be welded, one (1) to each ladder beam, at the ladder egress with a spreader bar to mounted between the eyes. This design will distribute a load evenly across the ladder beams because of a single lifting eye on the spreader bar. The bar is retained by two (2) locking pins, one (1) at each end outboard of each eye. Leveling is maintained by the bar rotating in the eyes. MANSAVERTM BARS, AERIAL TURNTABLE ManSaverFm bars will be installed at the aerial turntable. WATER SYSTEM A waterway system will be provided consisting of the following components and features: The integral telescopic water system will consist of a 4.50" diameter tube in the base section, a 4.00" diameter tube in the lower mid-section, a 3.50" diameter tube in the upper mid-section and a 3.00" diameter tube in the fly section. The telescopic waterway will be constructed of anodized aluminum pipe. The aerial will be capable of discharging up to 1000 gpm at 100 psi parallel to the ladder and 90 degrees to each side of center. An adjustable pressure relief valve will be furnished to protect the aerial waterway from a pressure surge. Two (2) 1.50" drain valves will be located at the lowest points of the waterway system. WATERWAY SEALS Page 75 of 92 The waterway seals will be of type -B PolyPak design, composed of nitroxile seal and a nitrile wiper, which together offer maximum stability and extrusion resistance on the waterway. The seal will be capable of withstanding pressures up to 2000 psi, temperatures in excess of 250 degrees Fahrenheit and have resistance to all foam generating solutions. The seals will be internally lubricated. The waterway seals will have automatic centering guides constructed of synthetic thermalpolymer. The guides will provide positive centering of the extendible sections within each other and the base section to insure longer service life and smoother operation. AERIAL MONITOR An Akron, model 3578 monitor with stow and deploy will be provided at the tip with a Akron 1250 gpm model 5177. The monitor's functions will be controlled electrically from two (2) separate locations. One (1) control will be located at the control console and the other at the ladder tip. There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls. AERIAL MONITOR An Akron Model 3578 monitor w/stow and deploy, and a 5177, (1250 gallon per minute), variable stream nozzle with built in stream shaper will be provided. The monitor will be capable of delivering flows up to 1000 gpm. The actuators will allow for vertical travel of 135 degrees below the centerline of the aerial and 90 degrees on either side of center. The unit will be equipped with two (2) control boxes: one (1) at the aerial tip and one (1) on the turntable control console. The monitor controls will include "one touch" stow and deploy function at the turntable location. There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls. FLOW METER (Aerial Waterway) A Fire Research Corporation (FRC), model DF430, digital flow indicator with a four (4) digit LED display will be provided for the aerial waterway at the turntable control station. The display will have a flow totalizer, programmable high and low flow warnings, and automatically adjust LED brightness for day/night viewing. AERIAL WATERWAY INLET The aerial waterway will be plumbed from the fifth wheel area to the waterway swivel with 4.00" pipe. A 5.00" inlet will be located on each side of the apparatus complete with a chrome plated cap. The individual "line" pressure gauges for the inlets will be manufactured by Class 1. They will be a minimum of 3.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black lettering. Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum/pressure range of 30.00"-0-600#. The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the inlet as practical. WATERWAY LOCKING SYSTEM The aerial ladder waterway monitor will be capable of being positioned at either the fly section or at the next lower section of the ladder. The monitor location will be changeable by the use of a single handle, located at the side of the ladder. The handle, attached to a cam bracket, will simply be moved forward to lock the monitor at the fly section and back to lock it to the previous section. There will be no pins to remove and reinstall Page 76 of 92 The monitor will be operational at all times, regardless of its position, without connecting or disconnecting electrical lines. The aerial waterway 1.5" drain valve will be mounted horizontal with a stainless steel extension with an elbow at the end to direct to the water rear of the tiller tractor on both the driver and passenger side. Valve acuation will be with a handle easily accessible from the side of the apparatus. This option will not include the drain valve itself. This option calls for the pipe and the valve to be painted job color. OUTLET, 2.50" AUXILIARY, AERIAL TIP HEAVY DUTY STEEL PAL An auxiliary hose connection outlet will be supplied at the tip of the aerial ladder. It will be located on the left hand side of the aerial waterway. Flow to the auxiliary outlet will be supplied by 2.50" piping. A 2.50" gate valve with a non -rising stem and crank handle will be supplied. A cap and chain will be provided. Flow to the aerial waterway monitor will be controlled by a 4.00" aluminum butterfly valve with a non -rising stem and crank handle. The valve will be located at the monitor inlet. A 200 -psi relief valve and a .75" automatic drain valve will be supplied in the waterway at the tip. TOOLS The following tools will be provided for retorquing of all specified bolts as recommended by the manufacturer: - Torque Wrench - All Required Extensions, Sockets and Adapters - 4 -to -1 Multiplier MANUALS Two (2) operator maintenance manuals and two (2) wiring diagrams pertaining to the aerial device will be provided with the apparatus at time of pick-up. INITIAL INSTRUCTION On initial delivery of the fire apparatus, the contractor will supply a qualified representative to demonstrate the apparatus and provide initial instruction to the fire department regarding the operation, care, and maintenance of the apparatus for a period of three (3) days. ADDITIONAL AERIAL TRAINING There will be one (1) additional aerial training day(s) provided by the manufacturer with a training engineer. This is in addition to the standard three (3) days. TILLER CAB A permanently mounted tiller cab will be located on top of the tiller trailer, to the rear of the aerial ladder. The maximum overall height of the tiller cab will not exceed 134.00". The tiller cab will be totally enclosed. The cab windshield will be automotive approved tinted safety glass and will provide a minimum of 1,513 square inches of clear viewing area. Each side window, directly rearward of the windshield, will be more than 536 square inches. The side windows, combined with the windshield, will provide a minimum of 2,585 square inches of unobstructed viewing area. In order to provide maximum visibility for the tillerman, there will be no corner posts at the forward corners of the windshield. Page 77 of 92 The upper area of each tiller cab door will be contoured into the roof, providing greater clearance when entering and exiting the tiller cab. The tiller cab doors will be equipped with drop-down sliding window. The windows will be 18.00" wide x 31.00" high. The rear wall of the tiller cab will have a vertically -split sliding window. The window will be 33.50" wide x 27.75" high. The tiller cab floor will be constructed of aluminum treadplate. A two speed electric windshield wiper with washer will be provided for the front windshield. The windshield washer reservoir will have a capacity of two (2) quarts and will be located forward of the tiller cab. An adjustable, telescopic steering column will be provided. Auxiliary lighting inside the tiller cab will consist of a 5.00" diameter overhead dome light with an integral switch. The following controls/alarms will be provided inside the tiller cab: - Buzzer signaling system with foot switch control - Jackknife alarm The following will be provided on the steering column support pedestal: - Two heater/defi-oster outlets - Diagnostic plug for trailer ABS system - Heater/defroster control switch - Windshield wiper/washer control switch The following controls/gauges will be located in the upper control panel: - Dome/step light switch - Tiller wheel position indicator gauge. (L -C-R) - Two 2.0" diameter amber turn signal & brake indicator lights The cornering lights will be controlled by a switch on the steering column. TILLER CAB HEATER For the tillerman's comfort, the cab is equipped with a 13,650 BTU heater/defroster. The heater will have a multi -speed motor and thermostatic control located in the tiller cab within reach of the tillerman. The heater will be diesel/kerosene fueled and will have a separate three (3) gallon fuel tank which will provide a minimum of 23 hours of continuous running time. The fuel tank will be recessed in the body, behind the driver side tiller cab access steps. There will be a minimum of two (2) defrost outlets in the cab for maximum defrost performance. The heater/defrost system will have an airflow of 85 cfm. Page 78 of 92 AIR CONDITIONER Air conditioning will be provided for the tiller cab. The unit will be manufactured by Danhard Inc. The air conditioner will have cooling capacity of 13,500 BTU. The unit will be 120 volt AC and will be run off of the onboard generator. The full load amperage draw will be 12.00 amps in the cooling mode. The evaporator will be located ahead of the tiller cab on the top deck of the tiller trailer. The air conditioning unit will not increase the overall height of the tiller cab. TILLER CAB SEAT A Seats Inc. 911 fixed companion high back style seat with forward and rearward adjustment will be provided in the tiller cab for the tillerman. The seat will be provided with a switch that is connected to a warning indicator in the tractor cab. The indicator will indicate the tiller driver is not present in the tiller cab. The seating position will be furnished with a 3 -point seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with an automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position. TILLER CAB STEPS For access to the tiller cab, a series of four (4) steps will be furnished at the rear on each side of the apparatus. The steps will be constructed of aluminum treadplate. The steps will be a minimum of 21.00" wide x 8.00" deep. Handrails will be provided on each side of the step assemblies for maximum safety. The steps will be illuminated for nighttime operation. TILLERMAN'S INTERCOM An Atkinson Dynamics two-way intercom will be provided between the tractor and the tillerman. The tractor position will require push -to -talk and the tillerman's position will be hands free. JACKKNIFE ALARM An audible and visual warning system will be provided to warn both drivers when the jackknife position approaches the maximum allowable angle. TILLER WARNING INDICATOR A warning indicator in the tractor cab will be activated if the parking brake is released and the tiller driver is not present in the tiller cab. CONVEX MIRRORS (tiller cab) A 6.00" diameter round convex mirror with adjustable arm will be installed on each side of tiller cab. The engine start switch in the tiller cab will be a footswitch in place of the standard push button. WINDOW DEFROST FANS Two (2) window defrost fans will be mounted in forward corners. TILLER TRAILER FRAME The gooseneck area of the tiller trailer will be constructed of 100,000 psi minimum yield strength steel. The gooseneck area will have a section modulus of 289 cu. in. and a resistance to bending moment of Page 79 of 92 28,900,000 inch pounds. The gooseneck area will be 46.00" wide x 13.50" deep. The tiller trailer frame will be box type construction to effectively resist trailer twist. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the trailer, with a continuous smooth taper to a 10.75" over the tiller axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 80,000 psi minimum yield strength heat treated .38" thick steel, with 3.50" wide flanges and covered by top and bottom plates to form a ridged box structure. Cover plates will be 50,000 psi minimum yield strength steel. The tiller trailer frame will have a section modulus of 257.7 cu. in., and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 12,880,000 inch pounds over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cu. in. with an rbm of 2,085,803 inch pounds over the rear axle. The overall length of the tiller trailer frame will be 462.00". WALKWAY, TURNTABLE TO BODY A walkway will be provided from the aerial turntable to the tiller body. TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE The tiller trailer axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800 pounds. Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of 100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile iron. The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel. Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations. The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative chamber above rated load. Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life. The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life. Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the trailer will be provided. The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle. The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle wheelbase. The turning angle will be 24 degrees or greater. TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE WARRANTY Page 80 of 92 The non drive axle system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty TILLER TRAILER STEERING Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy-duty power steering, will be provided. The steering wheel will be 18.00" in diameter, and capable of tilting and telescoping. BRAKES The tiller trailer brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance. SUSPENSION Independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800 pounds. The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces, and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment. Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each wheel end will also have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension. The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms. The torsion bar type spring and anchor lock system will allow for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. Adjustment for a lean will be accomplished within 15 minutes. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows 4.0" of ride height adjustment per side. The independent suspension will have been put through a durability test that simulated a minimum of 140,000 miles of inner city driving. TIRES Tiller trailer tires will be Michelin radials 425/65822.50, 20 ply "all position" XZY tread. The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc type wheels with a ten (10) -stud 11.25" bolt circle. OIL SEALS Oil seals will be provided on the tiller axle. INSTALL CUSTOMER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT The following customer supplied equipment shall be furnished to a preferred installer for installation. - One (1) MW -800 Motorola CPU & Monitor - One VRM 850 Modem - One AVL Pinpoint X Modem - Four (4) Motorola WPLN4208 portable radio chargers - One (1) Motorola Astro Spectra 800MHz mobile radio The apparatus builder shall not accept or warranty customer furnished equipment. Specific shipping requirements shall be followed. Page 81 of 92 ANTENNA INSTALLATION There will be four (4) customer supplied two-way radio antenna(s) installed on the roof. The antenna coax cable will be run from the antenna to To be determined at pre con. Specific shipping requirements will be followed. LOOSE EQUIPMENT The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit: - One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the construction of the unit. NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21. - Two (2) crowbars mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - Two (2) claw tools mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - Two (2) 12 lb (5 kg) sledgehammers mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open -Circuit Self -Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer. - One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s). - One (1) first aid kit. - Six (6) salvage covers, each a minimum size of 12 ft X 18 ft (3.6 in X 5.5 m). - Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - Two (2) scoop shovels mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. - One pair of bolt cutters, 24" (0.6 m) minimum, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. - Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components. - One (1) 150 ft (45 m) light -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components. - One (1) 150 ft (45 m) general -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components. - Two (2) 150 ft (45 m) utility ropes having a breaking strength of at least 5000 lb (2300 kg). - One (1) box of tools to include the following: Page 82 of 92 one(1) hacksaw with three (3) blades one(1) keyhole saw one (1) 12" (.3 m) pipe wrench one (1) 24" (.6 m) pipe wrench one (1) ballpeen hammer one (1) pair of tin snips one (1) pair of pliers one (1) pair of lineman's pliers assorted types and sizes of screwdrivers assorted adjustable wrenches assorted combination wrenches - One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSUISEA 207, Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five -point breakaway feature that includes two at the shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front. - Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28" (711 nun) in height, each equipped with a 6" (152 mm) retro -reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an additional 4" (102 mm) retro -reflective white band 2" (51 nun) below the 6" (152 mm) band. - Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminating capabilities. - One automatic external defibrillator (AED). - One (1) double female 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump). - One (1) double male 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump). - One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump). - Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump). - If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump). - If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3 in. (75 mm) will include a pressure relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6 (if equipped with a fire pump). - If the apparatus does not have a 2%z" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from 2'/z" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake (if equipped with a fire pump). - If the supply hose carried has other than 2'/z" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be carried to allow Page 83 of 92 feeding the supply hose from a 2'/z" NH thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2'/2" NH female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or intake (if equipped with a fire pump). DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (1) approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher. WATER EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (1) 2.5 gallon or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus. The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher. AXE, FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 8.8.2 requires two (2) flathead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. The axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes. AXE, PICKHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 8.8.2 requires three (3) pickhead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus. The axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes. WIRING SCHEMATIC One (1) copy on CD of detailed wiring schematic will be provided for the 120/240 -volt electrical system. PAINT The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as follows: 1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted include all chrome plated, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplate. Each imperfection on the exterior metal surface will be removed or filled and then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed before painting. 2. Chemical Cleaning and Treatment - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a high pressure and high temperature cleaning system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces at the conclusion of the metal treatment process. 3. Primer/Surfacer Coats - A two (2) component urethane primer/surfacer will be hand applied to the chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective base coat and to smooth out the surface. Page 84 of 92 4. Hand Sanding - The primer/surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish. 5. Sealer Pruner Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will be applied over the sanded primer 6. Topcoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching. 7. Clearcoat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be applied. Lap style doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be clear coated and the standard roll -up door warranty will apply. All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be removed and painted separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly. The cab and the body will be painted Pierce #351 Red. Prior to reassembly and reinstallation of lights, handrails, door hardware and any miscellaneous items an isolation tape, gasket or dielectric material will be used to prevent damage to the finish painted surfaces (no exceptions). A nylon washer will be installed under each acorn nut or metal screw that is fastened directly to an exterior painted surface. PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT The contractor will meet or exceed his current State regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions: - Topcoats and pruners will be chrome and lead free. - Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will be treated on-site to remove any other heavy metals. - Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency factor. - Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water wash process. If the dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating of 98.00%. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient. - Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed mechanically on a continual basis to keep the water clean. - Paint wastes will be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner. - Empty metal paint containers will be crushed and recycled to recover the metal. - Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on-site, or sent off-site for distillation and returned for reuse. Residue from the distillation operation will be used as fuel in off-site kihis. Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone depleting substances. The contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that his manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations. PAINT The tiller cab will be painted Red #351. Page 85 of 92 PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY The chassis frame assembly will be painted job color before the installation of the cab and body, and before installation of the engine, drive shafts and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc. Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly will be painted job color are frame rails, cross members, axles, suspension, steering gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting brackets, etc. WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION Limited Warranty Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that its cab and body are free of blistering, peeling, corrosion, or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint material selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any: Topcoat Durability & Appearance: Integrity of Coating System: Corrosion: Gloss, Color Retention & Cracking Adhesion, Blistering/Bubbling Blistering/Bubbling Dissimilar Metal and Crevice 0-72 months 100% 0-36 months 100% 0-36 months 100% 73-96 months 50% 37-84 months 50% 37-48 months 50% 97-120 months 25% 85-120 months 25% 49-72 months 25% 73-120 months 10% This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's undercarriage, cab and body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year Limited Warranty. In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Limited Warranty, except cost allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a period of ten (10) years against corrosion perforation. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. PAINT, COMPARTMENT INTERIOR The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks. AERIAL DEVICE PAINT COLOR All aerial device structural components above the rotation point that are not chrome plated or stainless steel will be painted. All buy out components, such as monitor, nozzle, gauges, etc. will be supplied as received from the vendor. All areas to be painted will be sanded to remove any metal flakes and smooth any rough surfaces. Page 86 of 92 All ladder surfaces to be painted will be phosphatized to remove metal impurities, aid paint adhesion and inhibit rust. The components will be prime painted with an epoxy primer and finished painted with a durable, high quality white paint (manufacturer's standard brand). The support structure and components below the rotation point will be painted job color. The torque box, stabilizers, tiller axle & suspension will be painted job color. The tip of the ladder will be painted a contrasting color for high visibility. REFLECTIVE BAND A 6.00" white reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body. The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level. CHEVRON STRIPING REAR There will be alternating chevron striping located on the entire rear-facing vertical surface of the apparatus including the rear door and bumper. The tillerman cab will not be covered. The colors will be red and fluorescent yellow diamond grade. Each stripe will be 6.00" in width. This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be covered with chevron striping. JOGS) IN REFLECTIVE BAND The reflective band located on each side of the apparatus body will contain one (1) jog(s) and will be angled at approximately a 45 degree "s" when installed. PIN STRIPE, DOUBLE TAPE A double pinstripe will be applied on the reflective band. The pinstripe will consist of a Black .125" stripe followed by a .125" void and then a blue .062" wide stripe. This pin stripe will be located on the top and bottom portion of the reflective band. REFLECTIVE STRIPE CAB DOORS A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel. This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement. REFLECTIVE STRIPE TILLERMAN DOORS A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each tillerman's entry door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel. This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement. LETTERING ON AERIAL BOOM There will be 6.00" to 7.00" high white reflective vinyl lettering provided on a separate panel on each side of Page 87 of 92 the base ladder section. The lettering will include a Black outline. The panels will be painted Red sign plate body color #351. GOLD LEAF BODY STRIPE A gold leaf stripe will be provided on each side of the body, over the fender. LETTERING The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl GOLDSTAR@ LAMINATION WARRANTY Limited Warranty Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce") warrants to the user that each Goldstar® lamination sold by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such Goldstar® lamination is affixed or installed is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user. A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal. LETTERING Forty-one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, outlining and shading will be provided. REFLECTIVE LETTERING 15 letters, 6.00" high blue reflective will be installed on on crew cab doors and front of cab. REFLECTIVE LETTERING six (6) letters, 6.00" high white reflective letter(s) will be installed on Rear of tiller cab. DECAL INSTALLATION There will be one (1) pair of decals furnished by the fire department and applied by the apparatus manufacturer. EMBLEM There will be one (1) pair of emblems with the words "HONORING AMERICA'S BRAVEST 9-11-01" and a firefighter's helmet will be mounted N/A.N/A The emblems will be color imaged. Page 88 of 92 EXHIBIT C Premium: $12,598.00 Bond No. 08971136 Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland HOME OFFICE 3910 KESWICK ROAD BALTIMORE, MARYLAND 21211 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT, Pierce Manul 2600 American Drive. PO Box 2017, Appleton, WI 54.913-2017 Inc. Fidelity and Ueposit company or maryiana (hereinafter called Principal), as Principal and 1400 American Lane, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1056 a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of MD with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, MD , (hereinafter called Surety) as Surety are held and firmly bound unto City of Newport Beach (hereinafter called the Owner) and to all persons who furnish labor or material directly to the Principal for use in the prosecution of the work hereinafter named, in the just and full sum of Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand Six Hundred Thirty One Dollars and 00/100 Dollars (82,099,631.00 ) to the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their respective heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, dated the 18th day of February 2010 -Jor Two (2) Pierce Triple Combination Pumpers and One (1) Pierce 100' Aerial Tiller. which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall fully indemnify the Owner from and against any failure on his/her part faithfully to perform the obligations imposed upon him/her under the terms of said contract free and clear of all liens arising out of claims for labor and material entering into the work, and if the said Principal shall pay all persons who shall have furnished labor or material directly to the Principal for use in the prosecution of the aforesaid work, each of which said persons shall have a direct right of action on this instrument in his/her own name and for his/her own benefit, subject, however, to the Owner's priority, then this obligation to be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that no action, suit or proceeding shall be had or maintained against the Surety on this instrument unless the same be brought or instituted and process served upon the Surety within two years after completion of the work mentioned in said contract, whether such work be completed by the Principal, Surety or Owner; but if there is any maintenance or warranty period provided in the contract for which said Surety is liable, an action for such maintenance or warranty may be brought within two years from the expiration of said maintenance or warranty period, but not afterwards. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 18th day of February , 2010 Pierce Manufacturing Inc. Principal Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland _ Surety Lucy A. H ntzsch At rney-In-Fact Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Law id Company, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and eff reof, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint Daniel J. SAPIRO, Daniel J. KWIE , Kathleen A. CRARY, Tracy K. MATTHEWS, Cathy HUTSON, Lisa c , all of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, EACH its true and lawful agent and A o - ma eliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any a b n xecution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, sh pon ly and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly exec ge ected officers of the Company at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper pe is vokes that issued on behalf of Daniel J. SAPIRO, Daniel J. KWIECINSKI, Wend3A E een A. CRARY, Tracy K. MATTHEWS, Cathy HUTSON, Lisa M. SLAKES, dated August 7, 200 The said Assistant Secretary does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Company, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 7th day of October, A.D. 2008. ATTEST: 'gyp Df POS W O . State of Maryland I Baltimore County ss.. FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND Gregory E. Murray Assistant Secretary By: Theodore G. Martinez On this 7th day of October, A.D. 2008, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. POA -F 184-6514 Dennis R. Hayden Notary Public My Commission Expires: February 15, 2013 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT BY SURETY STATE OF WISCONSIN ) ) ss COUNTY OF MILWAUKEE) On this 18th day of February , 2010 before me personally appeared Lucy A. Hantzsch , known to me to be the Attorney -in -Fact of Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland, the corporation that executed the within instrument and acknowledged to me that such corporation executed the same. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal, at my office in the aforesaid County, the day and year in this certificate first above written. My Commissiyrl Expires January 9, 2011 o (SEAL)_.R�(�po�c\l��� K hleen A. Crary P e�`, Notary Public in the State of Wisconsin County of Milwaukee KATHLEEN A i CRARY "fatOF W1 W1 �R``